Quarterlytics / Healthcare / Drug Manufacturers - General / Benchmark Holdings plc

Benchmark Holdings plc

bmk · LSE Healthcare
Claim this profile
Ticker bmk
Exchange LSE
Sector Healthcare
Industry Drug Manufacturers - General
Employees 501-1000
← All annual reports
FY2016 Annual Report · Benchmark Holdings plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Harnessing 
biological  
control to drive 
sustainable 
growth

ANNUAL REPORT 2016

BIOTECHNOLOGY WILL DRIVE   
THE BLUE REVOLUTION

As the world wrestles with the 
challenge of feeding a vast and 
growing population, there is an 
urgent need to professionalise 
and modernise aquaculture. 
Oceans cover 70% of the world’s 
surface, but only produce 2% of 
our food, making the aquaculture 
industry the fastest growing form 
of protein production.

With 90% of the Company now involved  
in aquaculture, Benchmark is at the 
forefront of the ‘Blue Revolution’ offering  
an integrated package of products and 
services to customers in over 70 countries. 
Benchmark’s customers are increasingly 
recognising the significant value this can 
deliver in terms of driving their productivity, 
sustainability and profitability.

Registered office:

Benchmark Holdings plc 
Benchmark House 
8 Smithy Wood Drive 
Sheffield S35 1QN 
Registered number: 04115910

2016 HIGHLIGHTS

CONTENTS

£m

Revenue

EBITDA from Trading Activities1

Adjusted EBITDA2

Operating loss

Basic loss per share (pence)

Net cash

2016

109.4

22.3

9.2

(20.5)

(4.39)

0.4

2015

44.2

2.4

(5.7)

(11.6)

(5.96)

13.4

Operational Highlights

• 

Integration of INVE acquisition  
on track, synergies delivered with 
Benchmark Group include

—  First sales of new aquaculture 
vaccine for sea bass achieved 

—  First major tilapia breeding 

programme in Asia for Spring 
Genetics secured post period end 

•  Bolt-on acquisition of world  

leading shrimp breeding programme 
in Colombia 

•  Adverse environmental factors 

mitigated by diversified Group portfolio 

•  £16m investment in state-of-the-art 
vaccine manufacturing facility in 
Braintree in commissioning phase, 
first commercial batches expected  
in H2 FY 2017

•  Constructing new year-round,  

•  Acquisition of INVE Aquaculture 

Financial Highlights

land-based salmon egg production 
unit in Norway which will increase 
salmon ova production capacity  
by 37.5%

•  Ten year contract with top three 

global salmon producer supplying 
genetic material, breeding selection 
services and health support

•  Pipeline of products continues  

to progress well

—  Eight products developed entirely 
in-house in final regulatory approval 
or have achieved first sales 

—  Current product pipeline of 94 
products with an addressable 
market of £783m

in December 2015 for US$342m 
(c.£230m) created new Advanced 
Animal Nutrition division 

—  Funded by £219m (gross)  
equity raise and US$70m 
revolving credit facility

• 

INVE revenue of £55m in line  
with expectations

•  Like for like3 revenue up 20%  

to £30m (2015: £25m)

•  Operating loss reflects

—  £12.9m expensed acquisition 
and integration costs related  
to INVE

—  £11.7m investment in expensed 

R&D (2015: £6.6m) 

•  £30.7m (gross) equity placing in 

August 2016 to fund capital projects 
and bolt-on acquisitions

•  Cash and cash equivalents at period 
end of £38.1m (2015: £13.6m)

1  EBITDA from Trading Activities — excludes costs relating to Investing Activities from reported IFRS numbers. Investing Activities comprise exceptional 

restructuring costs, acquisition costs, pre-operational expenses for new ventures and research and development expenditure.

2 Adjusted EBITDA — EBITDA before exceptional and acquisition cost.

3  Like for like — statutory IFRS results excluding businesses acquired in either 2016 or 2015 (principally including the Breeding and Genetics division and INVE).

01.   
Strategic Report 

02.   
Governance 

03.   
Financial Statements 

08  Benchmark at a Glance

62 

Introduction to the Board

86 

Independent Auditor’s Report

10  Realising Value

64 

 Leadership

87 

 Consolidated Income Statement

12  Chairman's Statement

68 

Effectiveness

14  Strategic Review

70 

Accountability

16 

 Market Opportunities

74  Remuneration

18  Business Review

79  Shareholders

79  Directors’ Report

83 

 Directors’ Responsibility 
Statement

20   Knowledge Services — 
Sustainability Science  
and Technical Publishing

24  Genetics

28  Nutrition

32  Health

36  Business Model

40  Our People 

44  Our Responsibility and Impact

48 

Financial Review 

48  Key Performance Indicators 

56  Risk Management

58 

 Principal Risks and Uncertainties

88 

 Consolidated Statement  
of Comprehensive Income

89  Consolidated Balance Sheet

90  Company Balance Sheet

91 

92 

93 

94 

95 

 Consolidated Statement  
of Changes in Equity

 Company Statement  
of Changes in Equity

 Consolidated Statement  
of Cash Flows

 Company Statement  
of Cash Flows

 Notes Forming Part  
of the Financial Statements

04.   
Additional Information 

142  Glossary

143  Advisers

“I am pleased to announce that the Group has delivered a financial performance 
in line with the Board’s expectations, in a transformational year. Our strategy  
of diversification has mitigated the impact of environmental headwinds such  
as the drought caused by El Niño and the temporary Chilean border closure.  
Our acquisition strategy has already begun to show its strategic worth, providing 
access to a wider client base and technical insight which is enhancing our existing 
suite of products, as well as an established distribution network into fast growing 
markets. We continue to execute our strategy of deploying world leading technology 
through established distribution channels into long-term growth markets.

As planned, we have been investing in manufacturing capacity this year in order 
to serve our fast growing portfolio of products, with our state-of-the-art plant in 
Braintree in its commissioning phase. This increased capacity will allow us to 
deliver our product pipeline which continues to progress well, with a number of 
products expected to enter commercialisation from 2017 to 2019. Seafood is 
becoming a more desirable and important component of diets across the world, 
driven by increasing health, wealth and the limitations of the current food chain.  
We are now the world’s biggest player in aquaculture biotechnology, placing us at 
the forefront of this ‘Blue Revolution’.”

Malcolm Pye 
Chief Executive Officer

 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Setting a new benchmark for sustainable living 
— starting with food production

01 
Strategic  
Report

08  Benchmark at a Glance

10  Realising Value

12  Chairman’s Statement

14  Strategic Review

16 

 Market Opportunities

18  Business Review

20   Knowledge Services — 
Sustainability Science  
and Technical Publishing

24  Genetics

28  Nutrition

32  Health

36  Business Model

40  Our People 

44  Our Responsibility and Impact

48  Financial Review 

48  Key Performance Indicators 

56  Risk Management

58 

 Principal Risks and Uncertainties

 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Benchmark challenges the status quo in 
aquaculture, agriculture and animal healthcare.

Since 2000 Benchmark has consistently worked to build 
a platform to serve its customers, helping farmers to take 
control of their biological environment through the combination 
of genetics, nutrition, health and knowledge services. Through 
its in-depth knowledge of animal biology Benchmark is able 
to tackle the key issues in the aquaculture, livestock and 
companion animal sectors.

Image left: Benchmark’s vaccine  
manufacturing facility, Braintree UK

Image right: Benchmark’s 1650-acre  
commercial research farm, Oxford UK

£13.2m 

94

£783m

70

Amount invested  
in R&D for FY16

Products in 
Benchmark’s pipelines

Total pipeline 
addressable market

Serving customers  
in over 70 countries

WHAT WE DO

BENCHMARK AT A GLANCE

Our technology is at the forefront of our industry.  
Our people are right there next to the farmers.

  R&D facilities and farms

  Diagnostic laboratories

  Commercial services 

  Manufacturing/production

884

People

27

Countries

5

Continents

REALISING VALUE

We realise value now by providing products 
and services urgently needed today, whilst 
investing in capacity and technology to solve 
the problems of tomorrow.

Our strategy is to achieve first-mover 
advantage in high growth markets 
and to tackle deep-rooted issues in 
more mature markets. We aim to take 
a leadership position in our chosen 
markets. We develop and sell innovative 
products rich in intellectual property 
that deliver high margins and visibility 
of earnings. 

Our platform of capacity and technology 
is scalable, and combined with our deep 
insight into the challenges faced by 
major food producers, enables us to be 
confident that we will drive improvement 
in their profitability. By executing this 
strategy we will continue to build a 
business of significant value. 

Here we highlight some of the key 
developments for Benchmark in the 
last 12 months, as we successfully 
implemented this strategy.

£4m aquaculture R&D  
and trials facility opened  
in Scotland

June  
2016

May  
2016

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

September  
2016

August  
2016

£16m state-of-the-art 
UK vaccine facility 
entered commissioning

Acquisition of South American 
shrimp breeding programme

July  
2016

Commercial trials commenced 
for sea bass vaccine targeted at 
€300m Mediterranean market

10 year agreement signed 
with one of the world’s top 
three salmon producers

Launch of major sea lice resistance 
breakthrough, Salmosan Vet All-In-One

April  
2016

February  
2016

New 1,200m2 fish health 
lab opened in Chile

Benchmark ‘Top 1000 
Companies to Inspire Britain’

November  
2015

September  
2015

December 
2015

Transformational acquisition of INVE 
Aquaculture adds new division to 
Benchmark: Advanced Animal Nutrition

New Virus-Like Particle technology 
and expertise brought in-house

Major genetics breakthrough for 
pancreas disease (PD) and sea lice 
resistance in salmon

Key Highlights

In September 2015 our Breeding  
and Genetics team in Norway achieved 
a major victory for pancreas disease 
(PD) and sea lice resistance in salmon 
using Genomic Selection. This was 
followed in June 2016 with the launch 
of Salmosan Vet All-In-One, a new 
treatment programme proven in trials  
to kill all stages of sea lice. 

In November 2015 we secured an 
exclusive worldwide license from Saiba 
Animal Health GmbH to develop and 
commercialise a recombinant animal 
health vaccine using Virus Like-Particle 
(VLP) technology, building on our 
growing capabilities and supporting  
our strategy of driving innovation in 
animal health.

December 2015 concluded with  
a reverse takeover of world-leading 
nutrition specialist, INVE Aquaculture, 
adding our fifth and final business 
division. The deal was transformational, 
offering multiple synergies, cross-selling 
and new product opportunities as well 
as significantly increased distribution 
capability for the enlarged Group.

In April 2016 FishVet Group (F VG)  
— now the world’s leading aquaculture 
health provider — opened a new  
state-of-the art diagnostic lab in Chile 
offering customers rapid-response 
to disease identification and on-farm 
clinical services. This was closely 
followed by the official opening  
of our £4m aquaculture research  
and development facility in Ardtoe,  
Scotland to drive advances for  
a variety of marine and freshwater 
species, shellfish and microalgae.

We secured a ten-year contract win in 
July 2016 to supply one of the world’s 
top three salmon producers, Lerøy, with 
our salmon strains. In the same month, 
commercial field trials commenced for 
one of our new generation vaccines 
to treat Nodavirus, targeted at the 
Mediterranean sea bass market.

In August we expanded into shrimp 
breeding and genetics to meet the 
growing global demand for faster 
growing, more robust shrimp through 
the acquisition of a world-leading shrimp 
breeding programme in South America.

Our state-of-the-art vaccine facility 
in Braintree, UK, entered the 
commissioning phase following  
a £16m investment with first 
commercial batches expected in  
H2 FY2017. In Norway, construction 
began of SalmoBreed Salten, our  
new land-based salmon egg and 
broodstock production facility with  
a capacity to produce 150m eggs.  
This will replicate our highly successful 
land-based Icelandic model.

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

11

Alex Hambro,  
Non-Executive Chairman

CHAIRMAN’S 
STATEMENT

Strategic Summary

The year ended 30 September 2016 was 
a transformative one for the Benchmark 
Group and saw us complete and consolidate 
our strategic platform; from genetics 
and egg production through to specialist 
nutrition and into the provision of veterinary 
services and health products for the global 
aquaculture sector.

As a result, Benchmark is now uniquely resourced 
and positioned to provide an integrated package of 
products and services that have the potential to unlock 
some of the key biological constraints which hold 
back our customers’ production potential. The Group’s 
technology platform of genetics, nutrition and health is 
supported by our technical knowledge, manufacturing 
and research capabilities. This combination enables us 
to have a significant market presence in the three key 
aquaculture species — salmon, tilapia and shrimp.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Outlook

The long-term drivers of growth in  
our sectors, including the growing 
global demand for aquaculture 
products, which we expect to grow  
at around 5% per annum, will continue 
to benefit Benchmark for many years 
to come. In addition to capturing the 
opportunities for the products and 
services we have today, an important 
driver of our organic growth will be 
the delivery of commercial sales from 
our robust pipeline of new products 
and, although the exact timing of new 
product launches is difficult to predict, 
an increasing number of these are 
expected to come to market during 
2017 to 2019.

The current year has started in line  
with the Board’s expectations with 
some continued softness in the Asian 
shrimp farming market occasioned 
by the disease challenges faced by 
producers there. We expect this to 
recover once these challenges are 
met, however the exact timing of the 
predicted uplift remains uncertain.  
At the same time the salmon farming 
market which represents more than 
a third of Benchmark’s business is 
experiencing record high prices which 
look likely to be sustained. With new 
markets and customers opening up as 
our integrated offering becomes more 
familiar to the participants in the global 
‘Blue Revolution’, we look forward to 
the future with great confidence.

The Hon. Alexander Hambro 
Chairman

24 January 2017

Our customers are increasingly 
recognising the significant value that 
Benchmark’s technology platform can 
deliver in terms of driving their productivity, 
profitability and sustainability. 

The Group is focussing on delivering  
the many top line synergies arising from 
building this platform. In particular, we 
are concentrating on growing sales and 
market share in developing markets and 
actively exploring routes to market and 
strategic relationships in these regions. 
Furthermore, we are set to continue to 
execute our strategy of making value-
enhancing bolt-on acquisitions, and 
investing in some important strategic 
joint ventures to deliver significant 
synergies and sales growth. 

Results

During the year revenue grew 
substantially to £109.4m (2015: 
£44.2m). This was primarily as a result 
of the acquisition of INVE Aquaculture 
in December 2015 and the recovery of 
Salmosan sales and demonstrates that 
the business is beginning to scale. Full 
details of the Group’s earnings, cash 
flow and financial position are set out 
in the FY16 Financial Review on pages 
48 to 55. The Group made an operating 
loss of £20.5m, this was principally 
due to increased investment in R&D, 
significant acquisition-related expenses 
arising from the INVE acquisition and 
higher amortisation. These items offset 
an improved operating performance 
in the Animal Health division and the 
results of the profitable, newly-formed 
Advanced Animal Nutrition division. 
EBITDA before exceptional expenditure 
and acquisition-related costs was £9.2m 
compared with a loss of £5.7m last year.

Summary of Activities

The acquisition of INVE Aquaculture,  
a leading specialist manufacturer of 
primary stage, technically advanced 
nutrition and health products for 
aquaculture, was the most transformative 
event of the year and, indeed, of the 
Company’s history. This transaction  
has enabled Benchmark to offer a 
comprehensive range of products  
and services to our key markets and 
has significantly advanced our goal to 
bridge the sustainable food production 
gap. The acquisition has also opened 
up enhanced distribution opportunities 
for Benchmark’s suite of products 
across its other divisions through 
INVE’s existing network.

The INVE acquisition necessitated 
a substantial equity fundraise in 
conjunction with committed banking 
arrangements and facilities that 
will support the important capital 
expenditure projects and joint 
venture opportunities as we grow. 
As a result, our balance sheet has 
been transformed and we have cash 
resources in situ to provide the flexibility 
we need to capture the opportunities 
we currently see. As well as the INVE 
fundraise, we also raised a small 
amount of equity in the summer of 
2016 which allowed a supportive, 
strategic investor to gain a meaningful 
interest in the business. The £30m of 
capital raised at the time has allowed 
us to fully fund SalmoBreed Salten 
which is critical to consolidating some 
of our long-term salmon farming 
relationships and also to buy a world-
leading shrimp breeding programme 
from Ceniacua. This acquisition was 
completed in August, and together 
with INVE, provides us with important 
opportunities in the rapidly-growing 
global shrimp market and penetration 
into the key geographies of Latin 
America and South East Asia.

Whilst this fundraise was done  
when the share price was relatively 
low, we believe that the small amount 
of the raise, coupled with the strategic 
benefits the new shareholder brings 
us, justified the transaction. I’m 
pleased that the share price has 
recovered since the middle of the 
year as the market has become more 
aware and familiar with the potential 
growth inherent in the Benchmark 
business strategy. Our Capital Markets 
communications day in November did 
much to bring the Benchmark business 
model to the attention of the investing 
institutions and we intend to repeat this 
exercise at regular intervals.

We have continued to invest in new  
and improved production facilities in 
order to secure supply of products 
key to our future growth. The most 
significant examples are the new 
vaccine manufacturing facility in Braintree 
which has entered the commissioning 
phase, and the previously mentioned 
SalmoBreed Salten project where work 
has commenced to build a new salmon 
egg production unit in Norway which 
will increase our production capacity 
by 37.5%. Both of these projects are 
explained in more detail on pages  
34 and 26. 

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

13

Malcolm Pye,  
Chief Executive Officer 

STRATEGIC   
REVIEW

In Summary

Benchmark delivered a solid performance,  
in a challenging but transformational year 
defined by our investment in the future of  
the business. 

Through the acquisition of INVE Aquaculture in December 
2015, we now have a platform to serve customers in over 
70 countries and a superb route to market in the southern 
hemisphere and its fast-growing markets. Benchmark’s 
global distribution network in aquaculture, coupled with  
our comprehensive IP-rich technology portfolio, gives us  
an unrivalled offering. We remain focused on growing sales 
and market share in developing markets, including China, 
for our Genetics and Nutrition businesses, and are actively 
exploring routes to market and strategic relationships in 
those regions.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Delivering Core Strategy

Acquisitions and Integration

Our People

Since Benchmark was founded in 2000  
to set a new standard for sustainable 
living, the key issues at stake remain  
the same — food production is still  
the largest polluter and water/energy 
consumer on the planet. The food 
industry will have to evolve in order to 
cope with a huge increase in population 
to approximately 9.7bn by 2050 (UN), 
requiring an increase in protein production 
of between 40% and 70%. 

An increase in the production and 
efficiencies of farmed land animals  
will meet some of this demand, however 
much of the gains in production have 
already been optimised for terrestrial 
animals, and wild marine fisheries are 
expected to meet maximum production 
capacity of 93m tonnes by 2030. The 
World Bank in their report ‘Fish to 2030’ 
(2013), projected that aquaculture will 
continue to fill the supply-demand gap, 
and that by 2030 62% of fish for human 
consumption will come from this industry. 
We view considerable opportunity in the 
fact that much of the aquaculture industry 
is still relatively nascent, with significant 
room for improvement in terms of 
industrialisation and best practice.

With 90% of the Company now involved 
in aquaculture, Benchmark is at the 
forefront of the ‘Blue Revolution’. Our 
integrated package of both products and 
services is being increasingly recognised 
by our customers for the significant 
value that this can deliver in terms of 
driving their productivity, profitability and 
sustainability. However, the challenges 
our customers face do not stand still and 
we are therefore committed to continuing 
our investment in Benchmark’s technology 
portfolio and our in-market technical 
services for the products we sell today.

We have built a platform which can best 
serve our customers, helping farmers to 
take control of their biological environment 
through the combination of genetics, 
nutrition, health and knowledge services. 
We are delivering this by:

•  Harnessing the best expertise 

•  Deploying cutting edge technologies 

•  Being embedded alongside  

our customers

More detail is provided on how  
we are achieving this in the FY16 
Business Review.

At the end of December 2015, INVE 
Aquaculture joined the Group, adding 
advanced nutrition to our offering 
and largely completing the building 
of Benchmark’s technology platform 
and operating structure. Integration 
is on schedule, with the key account 
management programme progressing 
well and allowing us to identify and 
deliver the synergies. Work on the first 
co-developed products is well underway, 
and INVE’s distribution network has 
already proved beneficial for other 
existing Group products.

We continue to exploit the many 
synergies across INVE and Benchmark 
and expect to see increasing opportunities 
as new production challenges present 
themselves that require multi-faceted 
solutions in the aquaculture, agriculture 
and animal healthcare industries. 

In August 2016, we strengthened our 
genetics offering through the acquisition 
of an established and leading South 
American shrimp breeding programme 
which enabled us to take the lead on 
pathogen-resistant shrimp and added 
the third major aquaculture species 
shrimp to our already strong aquaculture 
breeding business in salmon and tilapia. 
This has enabled us to increase our 
market penetration into the fast-growing 
global shrimp industry, which is seeing 
strong and growing customer demand 
for disease resilient stock. Our physical 
presence in the region also enhances 
penetration into the South American 
market for our wider suite of products.

Challenges

The ongoing effect of El Niño and  
disease challenges in South East Asia 
and Latin America, coupled with low 
market prices in the shrimp sector,  
is resulting in delayed sector investment 
and lower growth rates in the short-term 
in both regions. The unexpected border 
closure in Chile also impacted sales for 
salmon eggs. This has to some extent 
been offset by our ability to grow sales  
in other developing markets and now that 
the border has reopened we are starting 
to recover sales in Chile. The strong US 
dollar against many other currencies has 
also negatively affected trading in some 
markets where our products are priced  
in dollars, in particular Latin America.

We are a technology and innovation-
driven company, which means our 
success is driven by having very high 
calibre, skilled and driven people at 
every level of the business. During the 
year we have secured some extremely 
high quality people, particularly within 
our health, nutrition and breeding and 
genetics divisions. We are already 
seeing the positive impacts of these 
new appointments in their areas of the 
business, with many joining from major 
industry players.

I am immensely proud of our team’s 
response to our fast-paced acquisition 
strategy. We’ve acquired businesses 
with excellent management and 
like-minded teams that have similar 
values to Benchmark, which has made 
it easier to maintain and grow our 
culture whilst growing the business. 
INVE’s integration into the Group has 
far exceeded our expectations, with the 
teams and workflows principally aligned 
and advancing the many opportunities 
available to us. 

Our employees’ passion and engagement 
makes a big contribution to the value we 
deliver to our customers and our success 
in the market. Our thanks go to all of 
Benchmark’s people whose culture of 
hard work, commitment and enthusiasm 
has enabled the Group to deliver the 
noteworthy progress reported herein.

What we can build upon

Aquaculture is a young industry with 
significant untapped potential to feed  
a growing global population. There is  
an urgent need to professionalise and 
modernise aquaculture. To meet this 
opportunity, we will advance our technology 
centre to drive progress in the areas of 
disease, growth, feed efficiency, and 
welfare as well as incorporating new 
vaccine, advanced nutrition, and genetic 
engineering technologies.

The Future

Thanks to our highly supportive 
shareholders and strong income 
generation, we have the opportunity,  
the platform, the technology and the 
team to grow our sustainable business, 
supporting a healthier, more sustainable 
future for food production. We have a 
major growth opportunity ahead of us 
in aquaculture and sustainable food 
production technology and we are 
uniquely well placed to deliver that 
exciting prospect.

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

15

MARKET   
OPPORTUNITIES

There is a strong demand for Benchmark’s  
unique integrated package of genetics, nutrition, 
health and knowledge services to unlock 
production constraints and boost efficiency. 

Aquaculture is growing globally across all key markets

  Crustaceans

  Diadromous fish

  Freshwater fish

  Marine fish

  Molluscs

  Misc.

Europe
:   4 . 5 %

C A G R *

C A G R *

:   4 . 5 %

:   4 . 5 %
:   4 . 5 %

C A G R *
C A G R *

:   1 0 . 6 %
China

:   1 0 . 6 %

C A G R *

C A G R *

C A G R *
C A G R *

:   1 0 . 6 %
:   1 0 . 6 %

2.8m

Tonnes

2.8m

Tonnes

2.8m
2.8m

Tonnes
Tonnes

43.6m

Tonnes

43.6m

Tonnes

43.6m
43.6m

Tonnes
Tonnes

Demand for 
animal protein  
is rising

Disease, animal 
health and welfare are 
becoming a limiting 
factor to production

There is an  
urgent need to 
reduce reliance  
on antibiotics

There is an 
increased need for 
professionalisation 

Americas

Asia (excl. China)

:   6 . 3 %

C A G R *

:   6 . 3 %

C A G R *

C A G R *
C A G R *

:   6 . 3 %
:   6 . 3 %

:   7 . 2 %

C A G R *

:   7 . 2 %

C A G R *

C A G R *
C A G R *

:   7 . 2 %
:   7 . 2 %

3.1m

Tonnes

Source: FishStat, FAO.
* CAGR refers to total market of 1950–2013.

3.1m

Tonnes

3.1m
3.1m

Tonnes
Tonnes

19.0m

Tonnes

19.0m

Tonnes

19.0m
19.0m

Tonnes
Tonnes

By 2050 global production is expected to increase by...

Emerging diseases drive 
demand for health products

Animal health and human 
health are intrinsically linked

Efficiency benefits trigger 
industry consolidation

•  Disease has a significant impact  

on production volumes

• 

In the shrimp industry alone, 40%  
of production is lost to disease

•  c.60% of all human diseases and 
75% of all emerging infectious 
diseases are zoonotic (passed 
between humans and animals) 

•  13 deadliest of these diseases  

kill 2.2m people a year

Global market statistics

•  Aquaculture is still a nascent industry

•  Modernisation will help in production

67%

Beef *

71%

Chicken*

90%

Aquaculture*

Early stage  
nutrition†  
$250m

Breeding  
& Genetics† 
Shrimp: $500m 
Salmon: $110m 
Tilapia: $316m‡

Animal medicines  
and vaccines sector  
is estimated at 
$22bn§

Aquaculture is growing 
globally across all key 
markets (currently $119bn 
global market*)

* Source: FAO.

•  Seafood consumption is increasing 

rapidly driven by a growing middle class 
in developing countries and healthy 
eating trends in developed countries 

•  Farmed fish has now exceeded beef 
production, and all future growth in 
seafood supply is expected to come 
from aquaculture

† Management estimates.
‡ Inocap.
§  Within the estimated $92–102bn animal health industry (includes 

diagnostics, medicated feed and veterinary services) (Source: Vetnosis).

1717

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic ReportSTRATEGIC  REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIAL  STATEMENTSADDITIONAL  INFORMATIONSTRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

BENCHMARK   
TECHNOLOGY   
CENTRE

Benchmark has built a platform which can  
best serve our customers, helping producers 
to take control of their biological environment 
through the combination of genetics, nutrition, 
health and knowledge services. 

The various components of the Technology Centre  
are outlined overleaf.

Roland Bonney,  
Chief Operating Officer

FY16   
BUSINESS REVIEW

In Summary 

The Group has transformed since the IPO  
in December 2013. We have invested £304m  
in M&A, adding two new business units: Nutrition 
and Genetics to our existing platform.

During 2016 the Group operational structure evolved into what 
we now call Benchmark’s Technology Centre which recognises 
that nutrition, genetics and health, the markets served by 
three of our operating divisions, are supported and served 
by ‘knowledge services’ which encompasses the work of our 
Sustainability Science division and Technical Publishing division.

We have made significant progress this year in building  
our platform to completely serve our customers’ needs and 
help them to take control of their biological environment.  
We have done this by harnessing the best expertise, deploying 
cutting edge technologies and embedding ourselves alongside 
our customers — with our hands in the water and our feet  
in the mud. 

We outline in the following sections how the Benchmark 
Technology Centre is used to deliver this, and a review of  
our operations in the year. 

Bench m ark Technology Centre

G enetics

K no wledge
Services

H ealth

D

e

a

c

r

o

p
l
o

s

s

yi

n

g

o

u

r 

o

u

m

r t

e

a

r

k

c

h

n

o
l
o

g

y

N utrition

A

q

u

a

c

e
t
s

u

lt

u
r
e

c

o

Liv

m

e

p

a

s
t
o

n
i
o

c

k

n

a

n

d

a

n
i

m

a

ls

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

19

 
 
 
 
KNOWLEDGE SERVICES

For informed management

For our customers, understanding the disease 
threats and determining livestock performance 
through optimised health, genetics and nutrition  
is essential to the productivity and sustainability  
of their business. We do this through cutting edge 
research and trials, and by deploying our globally-
renowned team of specialists on a consultancy 
basis. Our team has been hand-selected for its 
unique insight and expertise.

Image left:    Benchmark’s 420-acre commercial 

research farm in Jaboticabal,  
São Paulo Brazil

Image right:   Benchmark’s aquaculture trials 
facility, Pisa Italy

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

How we are delivering our strategy

Harnessing the best expertise

Deploying cutting edge technologies 

Embedded alongside our customers 

•  Creating the best insight  

through globally recognised 
specialists, veterinarians, and  
food production experts 

•  Training the next generation of 

innovators through our work with 
Universities and CPD programmes

•  Sharing best practice with customers 
in order to lift standards of production 

•  Taking aquaculture diagnostics into 
the digital age — Benchmark has 
transferred human cancer cell 
screening techniques into aquaculture 
for early disease identification

•  Developing software platforms  

for tracking, clinical management 
and real-time analysis of supply — 
our histopathology team is available 
24 hours a day in locations across 
the globe

• 

Integrated health management — 
directly involved in decision making 
alongside our customers 

•  At the coalface of aquaculture 

industry, allowing us unique insight 
and first mover advantage

•  Long-term partnerships with 

blue-chip food chain companies, 
validating our position as a  
market leader

At the front line

R&D capabilities

We have a breadth of experience  
across the aquaculture, agriculture  
and animal healthcare sectors.  
Our world-leading aquatic health 
business serves customers across 
the entirety of the supply chain from 
farming, feed, pharma and processors.  
With 75 veterinarians and fish health 
professionals spanning four continents, 
we have prescribing veterinary surgeons 
in all of our key markets ensuring we 
are the first to respond to existing and 
new disease challenges.

Benchmark’s R&D sites  
— accessing customers  
and markets worldwide

We continue to invest in our R&D 
capabilities to overcome the bottlenecks 
in development of an aquaculture 
industry which is particularly underserved 
due to a lack of trials facilities. To that 
end we now have trial facilities across 
the globe, from our flagship site in 
Ardtoe to warm water units in Thailand 
and Brazil. This allows us to test a 
myriad of treatments in a controlled 
environment and develop treatments 
and products entirely in-house. 

Our product pipeline also continues to 
develop — we now have 94 products 
in our portfolio with an addressable 
market of over £780m.

40% of Benchmark’s animal 
health pipeline is currently 
exclusively being developed  
at our in-house facilities.

Ardtoe, Scotland
Aquaculture trials 
unit and cold water 
challenge unit

Chonburi, Thailand (x2) 
Shrimp and tilapia nutritional 
trials unit and warm water 
challenge trial unit

Oxford, England
Commercial  
research farm

Miami, US 
Tilapia trials unit

Jaboticabal, Brazil 
Tilapia trials unit and 
agriculture R&D farm

Pisa, Italy 
Warm water 
nutritional trials

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

21

REVIEW OF OPERATIONS   
IN THE YEAR

Knowledge Services — 
Sustainability Science and 
Technical Publishing Division 

Trials commence at new 
aquaculture R&D facility 

FAI Ardtoe, Benchmark’s aquaculture 
R&D and trials unit, marked half a 
century of service to aquaculture in May 
2016 by unveiling the new state-of-the-
art facility. The site has been expanded 
to help overcome the bottlenecks in 
development caused by a lack of trial 
facilities in the aquaculture industry.

The trials unit is approved by the UK 
Home Office to undertake safety and 
infection trials and is expected to be 
accredited Good Laboratory Practice by 
the end of March 2017. The capacity 
that is available to us now means  
that we can run multiple trials for 
multiple species, at the same time  
and independently from one another — 
allowing us to develop the Benchmark 
pipeline faster. 

R&D expansion into  
new species

FAI Brazil, Benchmark’s established 
commercial agriculture research farm 
in São Paulo State, expanded its reach 
into warm water aquaculture this  
year by building a tilapia hatchery to 
support our genetics business. Tilapia 
is today the most farmed fish species 
in Brazil, and demand for this product 
outstrips production. In some regions, 
including São Paulo State, growth is 
predicted at 20% per year in the next 
10 years, reaching 35 thousand metric 
tons per year.

Benchmark’s tilapia hatchery is 
expected to produce 500,000 fingerlings 
per month and will be based upon our 
high-genetic-merit strains. We have 
built in greater capacity for fish health, 
feed and genetics trials to support 
our product portfolio and to help 
further instill knowledge into the South 
American industry to support future 
sustainable growth. 

The key operational and strategic business 
activities are highlighted below.

Growing global influence

Benchmark’s work extends to the end 
of the supply chain where we provide 
sustainable sourcing solutions to global 
food brands. This year FAI added two 
new major global brands to our list  
of consultancy clients: IKEA Food,  
the €1.6bn turnover food business  
of the IKEA Group, and Ferrero, one 
of the world’s largest confectionery 
companies with an annual turnover  
of €9.5bn. FAI have secured three-
year partnership agreements with both 
companies focused on driving progress 
on sustainability and animal welfare in 
key agricultural supply chains.

The conference was bigger and better 
than ever with over 130 exhibitors 
(2014: 112) from around the world 
showcasing the latest in aquaculture 
health and innovation and showed 
revenue growth of 64% compared to  
the 2014 event.

The sharing of knowledge, to further 
the growth of the aquaculture industry, 
is at the heart of the event. With 
this in mind, Benchmark expanded 
the seminar programme to cover 
topics such as the latest in breeding 
salmon with resistance to economically 
important diseases, seaweed farming 
technology and advances in fish health, 
biosecurity and sea lice control.

Growing industry expertise 

Official Veterinary Conference

The future success of the sectors  
we serve requires educated and skilled 
people equipped to navigate the 
challenges of sustainability. Benchmark 
continues to run a number of high-profile 
undergraduate and postgraduate 
aquaculture courses in collaboration 
with St Andrews University. This year  
we have seen a growth in numbers to 
over 50 students annually. 

We have also expanded our veterinary 
offering, introducing new Continuing 
Professional Development (CPD) courses 
and training modules. Training vets also 
gives us access to people in the field 
who have knowledge of, and will provide 
an excellent network for spreading 
knowledge regarding new products in 
our companion animal pipeline. 

Accelerating knowledge 
dissemination 

Aquaculture UK

Benchmark hosted the biggest 
aquaculture show in the UK in May 
2016, following the acquisition of the 
Aquaculture UK event in April 2015.  

Building on Benchmark’s official 
veterinary (OVs) training and educational 
services for Defra (Department for 
Agriculture, Food and Rural Affairs), 
we launched a veterinary conference 
named ‘Reducing the impact of 
notifiable animal diseases in the UK’ 
which was attended by 250 delegates. 
The conference featured lecture streams 
for large animal, small animal and 
equine vets with topics ranging from 
new thinking on the eradication of 
bovine TB, the potential threat to UK 
pets from Echinococcus multilocularis 
and an update on avian influenza. Round 
table debates gave delegates a chance 
to put questions to speakers directly 
and an exhibition of the latest products 
and services for OVs ran alongside.

The conference was organised 
as a joint venture by Benchmark 
in association with government 
department APHA. 

These platforms also give Benchmark 
first-hand insight into the challenges 
in the aquaculture, agriculture and 
animal health care sectors, giving us 
first mover advantage in our product 
development pipeline. 

Image: Benchmark’s aquaculture  
R&D and trials facility, Ardtoe Scotland

GENETICS

All farming starts with  
a choice of genetics

Benchmark carries out contract research and  
runs genetics programmes for a range of species, 
covering both established mature and emerging 
markets. These contracts are with some of the 
largest producers in the world. In addition, we run 
our own in-house primary breeding programmes 
with salmon, tilapia and shrimp. 

Our robust genetic material, combined with our team’s insights 
into the key challenges facing our clients and partners, allows 
us to drive real improvements in production efficiency traits, 
disease resistance and product quality.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

How we are delivering our strategy

Harnessing the best expertise

Deploying cutting edge technologies 

Embedded alongside our customers 

•  Highly skilled and well-qualified 
aquaculture genetics team in  
a relatively niche industry

•  World’s largest genetics company  
on selective breeding programs  
for all aquaculture species 

•  Breadth of knowledge secures  
our position as world leader by 
number of species

•  Specific genomic selection allows  
for increased trait selection accuracy

•  Customer-led approach to delivery  

of all products and services 

•  Harnessing existing technologies 
and developing new solutions to 
transfer into new species 

•  Forming strategic partnerships with 
leading companies on their breeding 
facilities and genetics

•  Unique land-based biosecure 

production — all year-round delivery 
and back-up facilities

Current and historical R&D programmes

25 applied 
programs for  
15 species in  
15 countries

At the front line

Benchmark is deploying the expertise 
developed over 30 years of salmon 
selection into other aquaculture species. 
The barrier to entry for competitors 
is high, as it can take a number of 
years to develop robust and effective 
breeding lines.

Benchmark has access to extensive 
data sets and front line knowledge, 
giving us the unique ability to transfer 
genomic knowledge to different species. 
Our work is currently focused on major 
consumer species including salmon, 
tilapia, shrimp, and also species growing 
in importance including sea bass, sea 
bream, cobia, seriola and grouper.

9

10

1

7

11

14

4

12

13

5

15

5

1

2

6

2

2

3

6

8

1   Atlantic salmon

7   Turbot

11   Sea bass & sea bream

2   Nile tilapia

3   Red tilapia

4   Nile, red & blue tilapia

5   Nile & red tilapia

6   P. vannamei

8    Atlantic salmon, coho  

salmon and rainbow trout

9    Atlantic salmon  
& rainbow trout 

10   Atlantic cod

12   Rohu carp

13   P. monodon

14   P. chinensis

15   Pangasius

Deploying  
Technologies

Shrimp

Tilapia

Salmon

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

25

Other major farmed species

REVIEW OF OPERATIONS 
IN THE YEAR

Breeding and Genetics Division

The key operational and strategic business 
activities are highlighted below.

Ground breaking research

Products in market

Expansion into new species

Major breakthrough in breeding for 
pancreas disease, sea lice resistance 
and infectious salmon anemia (ISA)

The team achieved a major 
breakthrough for pancreas disease 
(PD), sea lice resistance and infectious 
salmon anemia (ISA) in salmon, 
becoming the first salmon breeder 
to use new genomic technology — 
Genomic Selection — to breed PD, ISA 
and sea lice resistance into our fish. 
The use of the method will provide a 
significant advancement in resistance 
to PD, ISA and sea lice and hence 
significant savings for the industry.

First tilapia breeding program  
worldwide selecting for improved 
resistance to S. iniae and S. agalactiae

Streptococcus infection is one of 
the most devastating diseases in 
tilapia farming as it can cause huge 
mortalities of large size fish and is 
responsible for heavy economic losses 
for farmers. Spring Genetics (US) 
recently launched a pioneering and 
complementary preventative approach, 
implementing selection for S. iniae  
and S. agalactiae resistance based  
on controlled challenge tests. Search 
for genetic markers is initiated.

Contract win — 10-year agreement  
with leading salmon producer

World-leading marine shrimp breeding 
programme brought in-house

In July 2016, Benchmark signed a  
10-year agreement with Lerøy — one  
of the world’s top three salmon producers 
— to supply our SalmoBreed genetic 
strain into its production sites. The 
contract represents an endorsement 
of SalmoBreed’s ability to produce 
world-class salmon strains and is an 
encouraging collaboration with one of 
the largest producers in the industry.

Lumpfish — Success in the  
Faroe Islands

In 2016 StofnFiskur delivered 1.5m 
lumpfish to the Faroe Islands market. 
The production has been a proven 
success resulting in two of our clients 
not having used any treatment for sea 
lice other than lumpfish this year. The 
lumpfish have high survival rates after 
transport from Iceland and immediately 
commence feeding on sea lice when 
introduced to the salmon cages. 

In response to the strong and globally 
growing customer demand for disease 
resilient shrimp, we acquired a South 
American L. vannamei shrimp breeding 
programme in August 2016 that has 
bred populations with high levels of 
resistance to some of the major diseases 
affecting the shrimp industry worldwide. 
This allows us the opportunity to cross-sell 
shrimp genetics alongside our existing 
nutrition and health products.

Increasing capacity

In September construction commenced 
of SalmoBreed Salten, the land-based 
salmon broodstock and egg production 
facility in Norway. The 10,000 square 
metre unit replicates our successful 
onshore facility in Iceland. The new site 
will give us the ability to hold broodstock 
on land throughout the production cycle 
and the capacity to produce 150m eggs 
per year for delivery all year round. The 
project was funded by the most recent 
fundraise in August 2016.

Breeding and Genetics — Product Pipeline

We have 18 products in our Breeding and Genetics pipeline with a total addressable market value of £95m.

Pre-Project

Project Phase

Test  
Development

Launch

Lumpfish

Salmon ova 
genetic traits

Tilapia  
genetic traits

Shrimp  
genetic traits

Addressable 
market: £95m

Lumpfish 
Iceland
4m

Genomics 
ISA
1m

Lumpfish 
Scotland
8m

Genomics 
PD
5m

Genomics
Sea lice
14m

Genomics 
SRS
2m

All-female
2m

DH021
8m

PF011
10m

DH022
8m

QF001
8m

DBV002
2m

DA009
3m

DT001
1m

DP001
5m

DS011
8m

DT002
1m

DP002
5m

£20m

£16m

£23m

£36m

Image: Benchmark’s tilapia breeding facility, Miami, USA. 
Harvesting a commercial performance trial to generate growth 
data for the Company’s tilapia strain

NUTRITION 

Caring for growth requires 
optimum nutrition

Advanced animal nutrition has strengthened  
our existing health and genetics offerings to drive 
performance and consistency of production.

By knowing, understanding, and inducing key biological  
processes at the earliest stages of the life cycle we can unlock 
the innate potential of survivability, development and growth.  
Our innovations and protocols have a proven added value in 
hundreds of farms and hatcheries worldwide.

At the front line

Customer partnerships

Operational excellence

We are market driven and science 
based. Our market intelligence from 
the front line reveals our customers’ 
practical needs. Coupled with 33 years 
of in-house expertise and collaborations 
with 25 centres of excellence, we are 
able to deliver bespoke solutions for 
any customer.

We have developed a rigorous  
approach to caring for animals.  
We offer a products and solutions 
portfolio based on the essential 
principles of care in the life cycle of  
fish and shrimp. We support hatcheries 
and farms worldwide with concepts, 
best practices and technologies that 
ultimately improve their bottom line.

We strongly believe that the only way 
to shape the future is to do it in close 
collaboration and partnership with 
the market. We serve our customers 
globally with the industry’s most 
comprehensive product portfolios. 

We are able to support them in taking 
better care throughout the life cycle of 
their fish and/or shrimp by contributing 
on a daily basis. This contributes to 
both our clients’ sustainable growth 
and long-term financial success.

Upholding our reputation for innovation 
and consistency, we continuously develop 
and market products that are used as 
benchmarks in the industry. From raw 
material to the finished product, we 
want to ensure that the highest quality 
standards are met consistently. Our 
high-end products are developed, tested 
and manufactured in-house at our 
state-of-the-art facilities to certified GMP, 
HACCP and Global GAP manufacturing 
standards, enabling higher-throughput, 
lower costs, shorter lead times and a 
more reliable supply chain.

To guarantee that our products will 
work under commercial conditions, 
our testing centres operate real-life 
hatchery production cycles for fish  
and shrimp.

Benchmark’s shrimp hatchery feeds  
drive consistency & profitability

*
r
a
e
y
/
t
i
n
u

n
o
i
t
c
u
d
o
r
p
/
$

35,000

30,000

25,000

20,000

15,000

10,000

5,000

0

Control

INVE

Total Costs

Total Margin

Total Revenue

Production runs/year

16.0

15.5

15.0

14.5

14.0

r
a
e
y

r
e
p

s
n
u
r

n
o
i
t
c
u
d
o
r
P

Benefits for farmers using the INVE feeding 
protocol (including FRiPPAK) increased by 
$2,464 per production unit producing 1m  
post larvae (PL) 15.2 times per year†

Absolute values ($/production unit/year)

Cost item

Protocol

Control

Total costs

–6,8%

18,459

Total revenue

+4,2%

29,200

Total margin

+22,2% 10,741

INVE

17,212

30,417

13,205

Production  
runs/year

14.6

15.2

* A production unit produces 1m PL per run.

†  Results were obtained over 18 months in hatcheries in Vietnam,  

Thailand, Ecuador (2), Nicaragua and Mexico.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

How we are delivering our strategy

Harnessing the best expertise

Deploying cutting edge technologies 

Embedded alongside our customers 

•  Our status as a world-leading 

•  Employing a multi-disciplinary 

• 

advanced animal nutrition provider 
stems from our ability to create and 
provide high-tech, high-performance 
and cost-effective nutrition and 
health solutions

•  This capability enables us to become 
our customers’ preferred partner, 
maintaining those relationships over 
the long-term

approach, allowing for greater insight 
and adaptability when faced with 
new problems

•  Focussing on manufacturing 

efficiencies which results in higher 
throughput, lower cost and shorter 
lead times

• 

Innovation is our driver

Locations and facilities — 
operations and supply chain

1

INVE pioneered early-life-stage 
nutrition and innovated hatchery 
nutrition hand-in-hand with 
forerunners of marine fish and 
shrimp farming 

•  Customer partnership and 

collaboration, combined with  
the best expertise in the sector, 
results in customer loyalty and 
market leadership

3

2

 Inventories

1   INVE Aquaculture Inc., SLC, UT, U.S.A.

2  INVE Thailand, Pichit, Thailand

3  TIAC, Tianjin, China

•  Artemia harvesting & processing 

•  Main production centre

•  Probiotics formulating & mixing

COOP SLB

•  Feeds & Health products final 
processing for LATAM markets

•  State-of-the-art facilities 2000

•  Artemia processing

•  Produces all INVE products

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

29

 
 
 
 
 
REVIEW OF OPERATIONS   
IN THE YEAR

The key operational and strategic business 
activities are highlighted below.

Advanced Animal  
Nutrition Division

Integration progressing well

Benchmark acquired INVE on 31 
December 2015 to strengthen its 
aquaculture offering and ability to 
provide a complete solution to producers 
through the combination of genetics, 
health and nutrition. The acquisition 
has provided Benchmark with scale, 
enhanced sales, marketing and 
distribution networks, together with 
aquaculture nutrition expertise to 
facilitate further pipeline development. 

A major focus during 2016 has been 
the development and delivery of the 
synergies between Benchmark and 
INVE including:

•  Sales and marketing infrastructure 
to launch aquaculture vaccines: 
INVE sells to customers in more 
than 70 countries and has direct 
sales and marketing in 16 countries. 
This provides opportunity to leverage 
this infrastructure to sell aquaculture 
animal health products. The business 
has helped facilitate ongoing 
commercial field trials of Benchmark’s 
first proprietary aquaculture vaccine, 
which is for sea bass 

•  Shrimp genetics: The purchase 
of one of the world’s leading 
South American shrimp breeding 
programmes mentioned above 
opened another major arena for us 
cross-selling shrimp genetics to our 
established nutrition customer base 

We expect continued demand for 
high quality early nutrition and health 
products boosted by favourable artemia 
pricing as a scarce resource. 

Products in market

Artemia

Artemia generates nearly 60% of 
Benchmark’s Advanced Animal Nutrition 
product sales (and gross margin). 
Around 3,000 tonnes of artemia is 
produced annually of which Benchmark 
has access to 600 tonnes, or 20% of 
the global market. The highest quality 
artemia available is from the Great 
Salt Lake, Utah, USA and Benchmark 
sources the majority of its artemia on 
a contracted basis from the Great Salt 
Lake Brine Shrimp Co-operative. The 
price of artemia has doubled over the 
past decade reflecting the increasing 
demand in aquaculture, against a 
limited natural supply of product. 

In response to this, Benchmark are 
investing in alternative early-stage 
feed to be used independently or in 
conjunction with natural artemia. 

Artemia replacements

Alternatives or supplements to artemia 
are required in order to support the 
predicted future growth of aquaculture. 
In addition to our product feeding 
protocol ‘Best Balance’ that replaces 
c.85% of natural artemia, we are 
investing in a product that replaces 
100% with equal or better survival 
rates and grow-out performance at a 
significantly lower cost, which is on 
schedule for first sales in 2020.

Health products

Benchmark’s health products cover  
all stages of production for shrimp and 
fish. We sell nutraceuticals (health 
boosters) to strengthen the immune 
system and probiotics designed to 
improve digestion and feed conversion 
ratio (FCR). We also offer product 
ranges such as Sanolife and Sanocare 
which are globally recognised for their 
effectiveness against a wide range of 
aquaculture pathogens, creating a more 
biosecure environment for the animals.

Advanced Animal Nutrition — Product Pipeline

Our Advanced Animal Nutrition pipeline has an addressable market size of £70m, with development through to commercialisation 
typically taking between 3–4 years for nutrition products. We have a long history of successful innovation and new product launches.

Development  
& lab testing

Field verification 

Market 
preparation

Start of sales 
up to 1Y

Artemia

Shrimp diets

Fish diets

Sanocare

Sanolife

Sanoguard

Addressable  
market: £70m

ART01
4m

SD04
0.1m

SC13
8m

SL16
3m

SD03
23m

FD05
7m

SC11
3m

SL21
1m

SG25
TBD

SG27
TBD

SC12
3m

SL22
0.1m*

SG26
2m

SG28
9m

ART02
0.3m

SD29
TBD

Thalapure
TBD

FD06 
Natura 50
3m

SC15
SANOCARE 
FIT 1m

FD07 EASY 
DRY SELCO 
0.4m

SL17
0.4m

SL18
0.1m

SL19
0.3m

SL20
2m

SL23
SANOLIFE GUT
0.2m

£48m

£18m

£4m

£0.2m

Image: Benchmark Advanced Nutrition  
manufacturing plant, Thailand

HEALTH 

Healthy growth  
drives efficiency

The health and welfare of animals is at the heart 
of a thriving and sustainable food chain. A healthy 
animal delivers healthy growth. 

Disease is a significant barrier to sustainable production.  
For example, disease and parasites are the largest restriction 
on the growth of aquaculture. Benchmark is investing in new 
animal healthcare technologies to solve major production 
challenges in aquaculture, agriculture and animal healthcare.

Image: Benchmark Vaccines, Braintree UK

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

How we are delivering our strategy

Harnessing the best expertise

Deploying cutting edge technologies 

Embedded alongside our customers 

•  A world-leading team of expert 
scientists with deep roots in 
pharmaceutical development  
— some having previously worked  
for some of the major players  
in the industry

•  Leading research collaborations  
with prominent industry players  
to widen the net for discovery  
and mutual benefit

•  Our innovative approach results  

• 

in lower production costs and time 
to market

Integrating our package of solutions 
to help customers achieve optimised 
production performance 

•  Customer focused health plans 

enable buy-in to a range of products 
throughout development

•  Applying new, more efficient  

delivery technologies that result  
in optimised product performance  
for our customers 

•  Our range of business units means 
we can employ technology from one 
part of the Company to another, such 
as VLP delivery mechanisms

At the front line

Building the technology platform

Manufacturing firepower

Our animal health pipeline includes 51 
products with an addressable market 
value of over £600m, including a suite 
of vaccines and health solutions (see 
page 35). The technologies that we 
develop and harness within the Group 
can be transferred across species, 
maximising our impact across the 
aquaculture, agriculture and animal 
healthcare sectors.

Benchmark has over 25 years’ 
experience in the manufacture of 
aquaculture vaccines. We have  
recently expanded our capacity at  
our in-house vaccine manufacturing 
facility to meet demand.

The new £16m biotechnology building 
in Braintree with 2,500 square metres 
of production capability enables:

•  Ultra-modern GMP (Good 
Manufacturing Practice)

•  Seamless transition from R&D  

to production

• 

Improved efficiency and flexibility 
combining both conventional and 
recombinant vaccines, including 
Virus Like Particles (VLP)

•  Third party manufacturing options 

providing short-term utilisation of any 
available surplus capacity

New BMK cell lines used  
for multiple targets

VLP technology is being 
applied to terrestrial and 
aquaculture targets

Technology  
Platforms

Several parasite  
infections can be treated  
with the same API

Vaccine antigen(s) through  
several species

Oral delivery systems can be 
 used across species, diseases 
 and medicine application

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

33

REVIEW OF OPERATIONS   
IN THE YEAR 

Animal Health Division

The key operational and strategic business 
activities are highlighted below.

In-market product performance

Virus Like Particle (‘VLP’) Technology

Salmosan 

Our leading product, Salmosan, 
generated c.£14m of sales in the 
period. Now launched in the UK, Norway, 
Canada and Chile, Group sales were 
impacted by generic competition in Chile 
during 2014/15, but we have managed 
to recover and stabilise our market 
share with Animal Health divisional 
revenues increasing by 18% in 2016, 
driven by Salmosan/Byelice sales. It 
should be noted that we expect demand 
for Salmosan to reduce over time as the 
product continues through its life cycle, 
as a result of generic competition and as 
new solutions to the sea lice challenge 
become available to the industry.

Product development progress 

Commercial field trials commence 

Our first vaccine to be entirely 
developed in-house commenced 
commercial field trials in July 2016. 
Targeted at the Mediterranean sea 
bass market to treat Nodavirus, this 
product represents a significant first 
for Benchmark as the full development 
process including research, design, 
development and manufacturing has 
been delivered entirely in-house by our 
specialist teams. This is the beginning 
of a new era of vaccine launches for 
the Group. We now have the platform 
and resources to take a leading position 
in our major markets to deliver new 
technology-driven vaccines and 
pharmaceuticals.

We are building on our growing 
capabilities for this ground-breaking 
technology supporting our strategy of 
driving innovation in animal health. The 
emerging technologies that we develop 
can be transferred and utilised in the 
aquaculture, agriculture and animal 
healthcare sectors. 

HypoCat — Benchmark’s VLP allergy 
vaccine which neutralises the Fel d 1 
protein — the primary cause of human 
allergic reaction to cats is expected  
to launch in 2020, and we estimate  
a potential market worth of £165m  
per annum.

Canine Atopic Dermatitis — Benchmark 
secured an exclusive worldwide 
license to develop and commercialise 
a recombinant vaccine for Canine 
Atopic Dermatitis (CAD). This vaccine 
is planned to be the first truly effective 
preventative tool against CAD. Unlike 
other CAD treatments on the market 
such as steroids, antihistamines and 
immuno-suppressants, which typically 
require continuous application and 
in some cases can weaken the dog’s 
immune system, this new vaccine would 
reduce the need for intervention and 
lessen the animals’ susceptibility to 
infection and illness. With an estimated 
152 million dogs in the US, Canada 
and Europe, the estimated total market 
value for treatment of the disease is 
over £1 billion per annum.

Sweet Itch — Benchmark entered 
into an agreement with Evax, a Swiss 
biotech company, to develop  

a recombinant vaccine to prevent and 
treat the most prevalent skin disease 
caused by insect bite hypersensitivity 
reactions in horses — Sweet Itch. 
The estimated total market value for 
treatment of the disease is over £100m 
per annum. There is no licensed 
vaccine available, and we expect the 
first commercial product to be available 
in Europe/US/Canada in 2020/2021.

Entering new markets  
at the front line

FishVet Group (FVG) opened a new 
1,200 square metre state-of-the-art 
diagnostic lab in Chile. The lab  
is currently the only aquaculture  
health facility in South America with 
histopathology and PCR capability  
under one roof, allowing us to provide 
producers with rapid response to 
disease identification and on-farm 
clinical services.

Building capacity 

We have significantly enhanced  
our vaccine manufacturing capability 
through the investment of over £16m 
in our state-of-the-art vaccine antigen 
production facility at our established 
Braintree site. The facility is one of 
only a few EU Good Manufacturing 
Practice (GMP) sites for animal health 
vaccines in Europe with a range of 
key manufacturing processes and 
a secondary packaging service if 
required. The 2,500 square metre unit 
allows us to significantly scale-up our 
in-house product pipeline and expand 
our toll manufacturing capacity.

Benchmark animal healthcare brings benefits to production  
species from the earliest stages of development to table 

Below is an example our technological strategies in the forms that we can develop and apply.

Immersion

Oral 
delivery

Benchmark
cell line

VLP
technology

Oral 
booster

Bath
treatment

Oral
delivery

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Animal Health — Product Pipeline

We have 51 products within our animal health pipeline of biocides, vaccines and paraciticides, with a total 
addressable market value of £618m. Of these there are 34 vaccine projects that can be manufactured at 
our newly upgraded facility in Braintree, UK.

Discovery/Pre-Poc

Passed Poc

Development 
Trials

In Regulatory

First Sales 
Achieved

Biocides/water 
conditioners

PAQ004
5m

EAQ004
2m

VAQ006
15m

VAQ017
25m

VAQ024
8m

VAQ002
6m

VAQ005
2m

VAQ007
3m

VAQ004
8m

VAQ019
1m

VAQ020
2m

EAQ002
Pre-Stock 
Rapid
25m

VAQ012
FryShield 
IPN
8m

VAQ016
MariMark N
6m

VAQ025
8m

VAQ031
8m

VAQ032
10m

VAQ010
1m

VAQ011
3m

VAQ015
10m

VAQ029
25m

VAQ021
3m

VAQ022
8m

VAQ028
3m

VAQ008
3m

Aquaculture 
vaccines

VAQ033
4m

VAQ034
10m

VAQ035
6m

VAQ003
5m

VAQ009
2m

VAQ036
5m

PAQ016
10m

PAQ021
10m

PAQ022
11m

PAQ007
9m

PAQ017
5m

Aquaculture 
parasiticides

PAQ015
1m

PAQ024
8m

Farm Animal 
products

VTS006
6m

VTS003
1m

VCO002
55m

VTS009
50m

Companion 
Animal vaccines 
/Other pharma

Addressable  
market: £618m

PAQ009
10m

PAQ018
10m

PAQ010
KleenKoi
5m

PAQ008
Ectosan
25m

PAQ014
Salmosan 
USA 
1m

PAQ006
Salmosan 
Bass/Bream
1m

VTS007
2m

PAQ023
3m

HypoCat 
VC001 
165m

£256m

£73m

£215m

£67m

£7m

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

35

BUSINESS MODEL

Biological control is a key driver for financial 
performance of producers in the food chain industry.

Benchmark’s business model is centred around the  
production life cycle, deploying solutions and preventative 
technologies in the earliest stages of life in order to boost 
sustainability and long-term growth. The Group is able to  
charge prices for these solutions that deliver good attractive 
margins, but represent only a fraction of the savings delivered 
to farmers and producers.

Early stage production 

Breeding

Grow-out

Broodstock

Hatchery

Nursery

Grow-out

E
L
C
Y
C

E
F
I
L

N
O

I
T
C
U
D
O
R
P

M
R
O
F
T
A
L
P

Y
G
O
L
O
N
H
C
E
T

S

’

K
R
A
M
H
C
N
E
B

Preventative technology applied at the early stage is worth $billions at grow-out

Early stage nutrition

Genetic products

Vaccines

6

Biocides/Water  
conditioners

5

Breeding programme 
selection

4

2

1

3

Veterinary health services 
and diagnostics

l

P
u
g
g
n
g

i

i

n

t
o

i

n
d
u
s
t
r
y

c
h
a

l
l

e
n
g
e
s

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Below is a diagram of a typical aquaculture production  
life cycle, overlaid with examples of products and services 
in Benchmark’s Technology Centre — effectively supporting 
producers in realising the profitable and sustainable 
production of high quality food.

Example issues and 
scale of their economic 
impact on producers

1   2
Genetics 

All farming starts with a choice of genetics. Benchmark  
sells high-genetic-merit eggs to producers, delivering the best 
starting point for production with excellent cost benefit ratio.

$4bn 

 Antibiotics use  
in aquaculture

3

Nutrition

$1bn 

 Early mortality  
syndrome  
in shrimp

$500m 

Sea lice  
in salmon

Caring for growth requires optimal nutrition. Benchmark 
supplies advanced nutrition products driving consistency  
in supply and better grow-out results.

4   5
Health

Healthy growth drives efficiency. Benchmark’s comprehensive 
suite of products provides both preventative and treatment 
options for existing and emerging problems. 

6

Knowledge Services 

Informed management is crucial to understand the threats  
on-farm. Benchmark’s team is on the front line offering 
actionable advice on a consultancy basis to reduce the  
impact of disease challenges.

Benchmark is becoming a ‘one-stop shop’ for all  
production related needs.

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

37

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GROWTH STORIES

Vietnamese aquaculture — 
rapid growth of a booming 
micro-economy

Working closely with ambitious aquaculture entrepreneurs worldwide to improve 
production, Benchmark’s Advanced Animal Nutrition division through INVE have 
witnessed many successes, innovations and breakthroughs. Below we feature  
the insight and experience of one of our partners. 

“Aquaculture produces food for 
millions of people. But in the  
first place, it is a livelihood 
for farmers and their families. 
By optimising local farmers’ 
productivity, we have a tangible 
impact on their daily reality.”

Rudi Bijnens  
INVE Regional Sales Director, Asia

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Just like in many Asian countries, aquaculture 
in Vietnam is a booming micro-economy. Now 
providing almost half of the country’s seafood, 
the aquaculture industry has grown into one of 
the most important sources of revenue for the 
local population.

“Mastering the hatchery stage 

has been the first step towards 
achieving better grow-out 
results. If you want to build 
tall, you have to start by 
laying a solid foundation.”

Mr Van Thanh Luong  
CEO Viet-Uc Group

Applying best practice hatchery 
management principles — controlling 
conditions from start to finish — to the 
nursery and grow-out stages, Viet-Uc 
is investing in large-scale farming 
capacity without compromising the 
shrimps’ health or conditions. Covered 
and aerated ponds combined with 
on-site water treatment and waste 
management make it possible to bring 
all environmental aspects under control.

Adopting game-changing technologies 
in feed formulation such as complete 
fishmeal replacement, Viet-Uc is a 
pioneer and innovator in the field of 
sustainable shrimp production.

Viet-Uc, Mekong  
Delta, Vietnam

One of the best-known growth  
stories in Vietnamese aquaculture  
is shrimp producing company, Viet-Uc. 
The business, run by entrepreneur 
Mr Van Thanh Luong, has set up 
the world’s largest shrimp hatchery 
producing 15bn post larvae (PL)  
shrimp annually. INVE works closely 
with Viet-Uc’s hatchery and farm 
management, optimising their 
operations and protocols.

Economies of Scale 

15bn post larvae (PL)

3,000m2 

31ºC 

The Viet-Uc Group has set up  
the world’s largest shrimp hatchery  
near Bac Lieu, Vietnam, which  
produces approximately 15bn  
post larvae per year. 

The grow-out stage has been intensified 
in ponds of 3,000 to 3,500 square 
metres each. Stocking densities range 
from 400 to 900 post larvae per  
square metre. 

Covering its ponds with industrial  
green-houses, Viet-Uc maintains 
a constant water temperature of 
31ºC during the hot season. Daily 
fluctuations are kept under 1.5ºC.

See more at www.inveaquaculture.com/growth-stories

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

39

 
 
STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Our People

BENCHMARK’S   
LEADERSHIP TEAM

PLC Executive Board

Malcolm Pye 
Chief Executive 
Officer

Roland Bonney 
Chief Operating 
Officer

Mark Plampin 
Chief Financial 
Officer

Athene Blakeman  
Company 
Secretary

Bob Long, Managing Director,  
Benchmark Vaccines

John Marshall, Technical Director, 
Benchmark Animal Health

Philippe Léger,  
Chief Executive Officer, INVE

Bob joined Benchmark as part of 
the BVL acquisition from Novartis in 
2012. He graduated in Virology and 
Microbiology from the University of 
London and is a Member of the Royal 
Society of Biology, a Chartered Biologist 
and a Qualified Person. Bob brings to 
Benchmark over 35 years’ experience 
in animal and human health.

John is Technical Director of Benchmark 
Animal Health. He has over 20 years’ 
experience in the animal health industry 
working in R&D, sales and marketing, 
business development, business unit 
leadership. John leads the Group’s R&D 
teams working on the development, 
sales and marketing of new animal 
health vaccines, medicines and biocides. 

Hamish Rodger, Global Managing 
Director, FishVet Group

Jonas Jónasson,  
Managing Director, StofnFiskur

Hamish Rodger graduated from the 
University of Glasgow Veterinary School, 
Scotland in 1984 and has worked  
as an Aquatic Animal Veterinarian for 
over 30 years. He has a Master’s in 
Aquatic Veterinary Medicine from the 
Institute of Aquaculture, University 
of Stirling, Scotland where he also 
completed his PhD on the EIBS virus  
of salmonids in 1997.

James Banfield, Head of Technical 
Publishing, Managing Director  
of 5m Publishing

James has over 20 years’ experience  
in professional and education publishing, 
holding positions with Longman 
from 1987 to 1993 as an Editor and 
Publisher, and then at Pearson Group 
PLC from 1993 to 2003 working in 
publishing and business development 
roles until he became Managing 
Director at FT Information Europe. Prior 
to joining Benchmark in 2012, James 
was Managing Director at KBC, an 
international education provider.

Jan-Emil Johannessen  
Managing Director, SalmoBreed

Jan-Emil has been the Managing 
Director of SalmoBreed since 2013 and 
has worked closely with Benchmark’s 
senior team since SalmoBreed joined 
the Group in December 2014. He has 
over 30 years’ experience within the 
Norwegian food production sector, 
having worked with Rieber (Toro) and 
Fossen AS (today Lerøy Fossen AS).

Jónas joined Benchmark in December 
2014 when StofnFiskur became a part 
of the Group. He joined StofnFiskur in 
1996 as the Chief Geneticist responsible 
for developing and running breeding 
programmes for Atlantic salmon and 
was appointed CEO in 2006. Jónas is 
responsible for running StofnFiskur in 
Iceland and oversees the production 
of salmon ova and lumpsucker cleaner 
fish for the salmon industry.

Morten Rye, Managing Director, 
Akvaforsk Genetics

Morten has been working with 
genetic research and applied genetic 
improvement programs for fish and 
crustaceans since 1986 and joined 
Akvaforsk Genetics when it was 
established in 1999. During his career 
he has played a key role developing and 
establishing the Company as a renowned 
provider of genetic improvement services 
to aquaculture industries globally.

Patrick Lavens,  
Innovations Director, INVE

Patrick has a PhD in Applied Biological 
Sciences and an MSc in Biology from 
the University of Ghent where he was 
also Guest Professor in Aquaculture. 
Patrick joined INVE in 1999 and has 
since fulfilled a number of roles within 
the Company including Technical-
Commercial Manager for Europe and 
Business Unit Manager Health. He has 
been Innovations Director since 2010 
responsible for R&D, new business and 
product development.

Philippe has over 35 years’ experience 
in the aquaculture industry and has 
worked at INVE Aquaculture (now 
Benchmark Advanced Nutrition) since 
its foundation in 1983. He has occupied 
a variety of roles including Research 
Scientist, R&D Manager, Manager 
Technical Department, Business Director 
Aqua and CEO. He holds a PhD in 
Agricultural Sciences from the University 
of Ghent and two Masters degrees in 
Environmental Sanitation & Management 
and Pharmaceutical Sciences. 

Pierre Hugo, Finance Director, INVE

Pierre joined INVE in 2012 having 
previously worked at Pfizer for 11  
years in roles including Accounting 
Supervisor, Controller, Senior Analyst 
and Business Finance Manager. Prior  
to this he spent three years as Finance 
Director at UCB Pharma and three 
years working at Sanofi Pasteur MSD. 
He has over 19 years’ experience in 
finance and holds two Masters degrees 
in Finance and Taxation, as well as Risk 
and Insurance Management.

Ruth Layton, Benchmark  
Co-founder, Head of Benchmark 
Sustainability Science

In addition to her role as Director of FAI 
Farms, Ruth is also one of Benchmark’s 
founders. Ruth graduated as a Veterinarian 
from The Royal Veterinary College London 
and has a Diploma in Animal Welfare 
Science Ethics & Law. She has extensive 
experience of consultancy within the 
food industry and with external parties, 
including various research institutes to 
tackle industry problems.

Stelios Leontios,  
Commercial Director, INVE 

Stelios has worked at INVE since 
1993 and has held several functions 
within the company including Technical-
Commercial Support, Sales Executive, 
General Manager of INVE Hellas, 
Regional Manager Europe, Regional 
Sales Director Europe and Commercial 
Director. He has over 22 years’ 
experience in Aquaculture and holds  
a Masters in Agricultural Sciences.

Image: Benchmark’s aquaculture 
conference, Aquaculture UK

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

41

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Our culture as a business is defined  
by our shared values, we are —

Brave & Ambitious

Practical 

Focused 

We challenge the status  
quo to create understanding, 
opportunity and innovation.

We deliver the day job, we 
keep it simple, we are honest 
and straightforward.

We are clear on our vision and 
know what success looks like.

Collaborative

Courteous & Have Fun 

None of us are as good  
as all of us.

Our manners matter,  
our humour helps.

A DAY IN THE LIFE

Birgitte Sørheim, Marketing Director  
for Benchmark Breeding and Genetics

Since joining Benchmark’s team in 
Bergen, Norway in August 2015 I’ve 
been able to use my combined skills 
and experience within marketing, sales 
and technical knowledge to drive results 
for Benchmark’s (at the time) newly 
formed Breeding and Genetics division. 

A typical day includes event planning, 
brand strategising, profiling, product 
launches, website production and 
generating advertisement, marketing 
and sales collateral. Exhibitions, 
conferences and customer seminars 
are also regular features in my diary. 
Our technology is highly advanced and 
specialised, so ensuring that customers 
understand how we can help them is 
key to my job and our success. Travel  
is essential to my role. 

We are a truly international group  
and it is necessary to visit colleagues 
and other Benchmark teams to fully 
understand how we can promote their 
brands and products, and support 
their commercial activities. It is very 
important that our marketing strategies 
and actions are in line with the needs 
of our international customer base. 

I am lucky to have a large base  
of skilled, talented and collaborative 
colleagues across the Benchmark 
Group and within Breeding and  
Genetics in particular. Our focus on  
the very start of the value chain for 
aquatic food production influences  
the entire life cycle that follows.

It’s incredibly exciting to know that what 
we do in Breeding and Genetics is going 
to influence the future of the industries 
we serve, and to work at a company 
which is a global leader in this space.

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

43

Image: Benchmark’s 
vaccine manufacturing 
facility, Braintree UK

DEVELOPING 
OUR INDUSTRY-
LEADING TEAM

2016 was a pivotal year for our People Strategy. 
The acquisition of INVE Aquaculture in 2015 more 
than doubled the number of people across the 
Group and increased our global footprint to 27 
countries, requiring integration across new cultures 
and geographies.

Working groups across key business 
areas were set up to map out and 
implement strategies for enabling this 
as well as identifying areas of synergy 
and opportunity.

The ease and speed with which this 
has happened has far exceeded our 
expectations. We believe this is the 
result of our closely aligned company 
values and our team’s continued 
appetite for embracing new challenges 
and opportunities.

A series of vision and values workshops 
were rolled out across key locations to 
ensure our senior leaders are united to 
ready the business for the next phase 
in our evolution and to take on the 
challenges of our dynamic industries. 

Succession planning remains a focus 
and our Management Development 
Programme supports this, continuing  
to yield success into its fourth year as 
part of our company-wide strategy for 
nurturing emerging talent and developing 
and investing in our employees.

The global team has continued to 
deliver results despite many working  
in challenging circumstances, such 
as the construction of the Braintree 
Biotech Building and the renovation  
of FAI Ardtoe aquaculture research 
Facility in Scotland. 

Ongoing recruitment for highly  
skilled, highly specialised positions 
across the Group — particularly within 
the areas of health, nutrition and 
genetics — remained a challenge 
throughout 2016, but renewed focus  
on developing existing and new 
recruitment partnerships helped secure 
a number of high quality appointments. 

Our growth and continued success 
is down to the hard work, talent and 
dedication of every member of our 
team. Maintaining a culture where 
everyone feels a valued member of our 
global team, regardless of geography 
or role, is central to our strategy as we 
enter our next phase of growth.

OUR RESPONSIBILITY   
AND IMPACT

Benchmark is founded upon what we call the 
3Es — Economics, Ethics and Environment. 
Businesses now need to deliver ethically, 
environmentally as well as economically to bring 
sustainable success and profits. We believe 
that it’s only when business gets involved that 
change really starts to accelerate.

The 3Es guide our hand, ensuring that we respond to the 
whole challenge and not to single issues in isolation. Here 
we list some issues of importance to humanity, and what 
Benchmark is doing to help tackle them. 

SM

Economically viable

Environmentally sound

Ethically robust

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Challenge

Benchmark’s impact

Antibiotic resistance

There are 15 World Health  
Organization (WHO) critically or 
medically important antibiotics,  
a number of which are still routinely 
used in agriculture and aquaculture.

Emerging diseases

Benchmark promotes and adheres to the ‘3Rs framework’ of Replace, Reduce, 
Refine to help drive responsible use of antibiotics in agriculture and aquaculture. 
It is essential that we take responsibility to preserve the effectiveness of all 
antibiotics for the benefit of people, animals and the environment.

Disease is a significant barrier to 
sustainable production. New disease 
threats can be a limiting factor for  
all animal production systems, 
particularly within the young, fast-
growing aquaculture industry.

Benchmark is investing in technologies to accelerate the early identification of new 
diseases through our state-of-the-art histopathology equipment, enabling producers 
to act rapidly and reduce losses. Across the Group we are investing in vaccine 
development as a means of a preventing some of the leading health challenges 
facing our industries. We continue to train and educate our people and customers 
in best-practice prevention and management of key diseases. 

Animal welfare

Giving an animal a ‘life worth living’ 
requires good husbandry, considerate 
handling and transport, humane 
slaughter and, above all else, skilled 
and conscientious stockmen (FAWC*).

Energy use

Climate change and rising costs  
of energy are key challenges facing 
every business. 

Community engagement

Contributing to the well-being  
of communities.

Health and safety

Everyone has the right to go home  
unharmed and we all have a 
responsibility to ensure that we do.

Benchmark’s team of animal health experts, combined with our products and 
training services, ensure we adhere to and promote the highest animal welfare 
standards throughout our operations. We recognise and respect the ‘Five Freedoms’ 
(RSPCA), but strive to ensure the highest possible welfare potential for every animal 
under our care. For example, through assisting in developing and implementing the 
RSPCA’s Freedom Food standard for salmon.

In-house, as a baseline, we adhere to relevant environmental legislations 
and standards by implementing best practices within waste minimisation and 
management, energy use and water use. However, we always strive to do more.  
We are reviewing our footprint and identifying ‘hotspots’ in our operations where  
we need to make a difference — these often have economic and ethical benefits, 
as well as environmental.

We strive to have a ‘net positive’ impact on the communities in which we operate. 
For example, Benchmark supports FarmAbility in Oxford, an on-farm day service for 
adults with autism and learning difficulties to build their independence in living and 
working skills. Benchmark has supported the charity and its co-farmers from its 
inception, providing a base and facilities at the commercial research farm in Oxford, 
UK. The project has also been supported by Benchmark employees, with members 
of staff participating in a range of fundraising activities throughout the year.

Benchmark is deploying a commitment to health safety for every employee  
to sign up to as follows:

•  Nothing is more important than health and safety

•  Nothing we do is worth being hurt for

•  Nothing is so important we cannot take time to do it safely

•  We will never witness an unsafe act or condition without taking action

* FAWC, the independent advisory body known as the Farm Animal Welfare Committee.

Image: Benchmark’s 1650-acre commercial 
research farm, Oxford UK 

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

45

GROWTH STORIES

Investing in  
a blue-green  
economy

Working closely with ambitious aquaculture entrepreneurs 
worldwide to improve production, Benchmark’s Advanced 
Animal Nutrition division through INVE has witnessed many 
successes, innovations and breakthroughs. Below we feature 
the insight and experience of one of our partners.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

As global seafood consumption increases, 
producing the volumes necessary to maintain an 
adequate supply is a big concern in aquaculture. 
Quality, food safety and traceability have become 
critical factors for anyone who wants to successfully 
market any kind of food produce.

Meeting the consumer’s 
demand for safe and 
traceable food produce

An environmentally friendly approach 
to aquaculture is no longer just an 
ideological standard, it has become 
mandatory to maintain production 
licenses and commercial viability.

Investing in the fish 
production of tomorrow

Philosofish by Bitsakos (‘Philosofish’) 
is one of INVE’s customers which has 
recently managed to double its yearly 
proceeds. The secret to this success: 
a thorough professionalisation of 
their entire operations, funded with 
new working capital. We see this 
phenomenon worldwide as aquaculture 
has developed into an attractive 
industry for investors, who realise  
its enormous growth potential. 

Philosofish used its new capital 
injection to increase its production 
capacity both in the hatchery and 
the farm. By expanding the hatchery 
and redesigning its set-up for a more 
controlled way of working, Philosofish 
can now produce more and stronger 
fry. The installation of additional sea 
cages enabled them to double their 
grow-out yield in a year’s time. Our local 
experts contributed to the new set-up 
of the hatchery and the optimisation 
of feeding protocols to support their 
increased production targets.

“Investing in aquaculture is investing 
in a future-proof production supply 
of protein for human consumption.  
A market that will keep on growing 
for many decades to come.” 

Panagiotis Bitsakos  
Aquaculture Entrepreneur

100% growth

Two species

By investing in a thorough 
professionalisation of their  
operations Philosofish by Bitsakos  
has recently managed to increase  
its yearly proceeds by 100%.

Philosofish by Bitsakos focuses its 
activities on sea bass and sea bream, 
two species that are in high demand  
on the Mediterranean seafood market.

Large-scale investment plan

In order to support the Company’s 
growth plan Philosofish by Bitsakos 
attracted new working capital, which 
allowed the Company to double its  
open sea cage farming capacity.

See more at www.inveaquaculture.com/growth-stories

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

47

 
STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Financial highlights

•  Revenue increased by 148%  

•  Animal Health division successfully 

to £109.4m (2015: £44.2m).  
Like for like sales, excluding 
businesses acquired in either  
2016 or 2015, increased by 20%  
to £29.8m (2015: £24.7m)

•  EBITDA from Trading Activities1 grew 

by £19.9m to £22.3m (2015: £2.4m)

•  Adjusted EBITDA2 increased  

by £14.9m to £9.2m (2015: loss  
of £5.7m)

recovered sales on Salmosan/Byelice

•  Acquisition of INVE Aquaculture 

in December 2015 for US$342m 
(c.£230m) created new Advanced 
Animal Nutrition division

• 

Integration of INVE went to  
plan and first revenue synergies 
were achieved

•  Temporary closure of Chilean  
border to Icelandic produced  
salmon eggs impacted Breeding  
and Genetics revenues

•  Operating loss of £20.5m (2015: 

£11.6m) after increase in investing 
activities to £26.7m (2015: £10.1m), 
including £12.9m of expensed 
acquisition and integration costs

•  Expensed R&D increased by 77%  

to £11.7m (2015: £6.6m)

£m

Total revenue

Gross profit

Gross profit percentage

Operating expenses — Trading Activities

EBITDA from Trading Activities

Profit /(Loss) before tax from Trading Activities

Total net costs of Investing Activities

Loss before tax

Earnings/(Loss) per share from Trading Activities (pence) 

Basic loss per share (pence) 

2016

109.4 

50.8 

46%

(28.5)

22.3 

4.3 

(26.7)

(22.4)

1.79 

(4.39)

2015

44.2 

16.1 

36%

(13.7)

2.4

(1.3)

(10.1)

(11.4)

(1.13)

(5.96)

1  EBITDA from Trading Activities — excludes costs relating to Investing Activities from reported IFRS numbers. 
Investing Activities comprise exceptional restructuring costs, acquisition costs, pre-operational expenses for 
new ventures and research and development expenditure.

2 Adjusted  EBITDA —  EBITDA before exceptional and acquisition costs.

Group results

2016 was a transformational year for the Group, with the 
completion of the acquisition of INVE Aquaculture BV on 
30 December 2015 to form the Advanced Animal Nutrition 
division which more than doubled the scale of the Group’s 
operations. The Group’s results include nine months of trading 
from the new division and this is a significant component of 
the comparison to 2015.

The continued strategy to build a platform to exploit the 
significant growth opportunity in the aquaculture market also 
delivers increased diversification of revenue streams across 
the supply chain in several species, both in cold and warm 
water. This has improved the Group’s ability to withstand 
individual market challenges.

Group revenue increased by 148% to £109.4m in the year 
(2015: £44.2m). The growth in revenue was achieved through 
a combination of the successful acquisition of INVE and the 
recovery of Salmosan sales in the Animal Health division.  
Like for like sales, excluding businesses acquired in either 
2016 or 2015, increased 20% to £29.8m (2015: £24.7m).

The Group continues to separate the statutory IFRS results 
into Trading Activities and Investing Activities, in line with many 
of its peers in the sector, to present better the underlying  

performance and development of the business. This is how 
the board monitors progress of the existing Group businesses. 
Trading Activities are those related to products and services 
that have been developed and are producing revenue streams, 
while Investing Activities relate to the costs associated with 
acquiring new businesses and products and services being 
developed for future revenue streams and include a pipeline 
of vaccines at various stages of the development cycle.

The Group’s statutory IFRS earnings (including both Trading 
and Investing Activities), set out in the Consolidated Income 
Statement, show an EBITDA loss for the year of £3.9m (2015: 
loss of £7.2m), and loss after tax for the year of £18.3m 
(2015: loss of £11.8m). Basic and diluted earnings per share 
are both losses of 4.4p per share (2015: basic and diluted 
loss per share of 6.0p).

Trading Activities

Gross profit of £50.8m was up on the previous year (2015: 
£16.1m). Overall gross profit percentage increased to 46% 
(from 36% in 2015) due to the change in sales mix towards 
Advanced Animal Nutrition and Animal Health products. Like 
for like gross profit, excluding businesses acquired in either 
2016 or 2015, increased 56% to £12.3m (2015: £7.9m).

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

49

Mark Plampin,  
Chief Financial Officer

FY16   
FINANCIAL REVIEW

Key Performance Indicators

Group Revenue

2016

2015

£44.2m

£109.4m

Headcount

2016

2015

402

Group EBITDA from Trading Activities

Products in Pipeline

2016

2015

£2.4m

£22.3m

2016

2015

61

884

94

Basic EPS from Trading Activities

Investment in R&D (including additions to intangibles)

2.3

1.8

2016

2015

£13.2m

£8.5m

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

0.0

(0.5)

(1.0)

e
c
n
e
P

-1.1

0.6

(1.5)

B asic EP S fro m 
Trading Activities 2 0 1 5

Im pact of Increased
Im pact of Increased
N o. of S hares

Earnings

B asic EP S fro m  Trading
Activities 2 0 1 6

Net assets

2016

2015

£92.1m

£367.7m

Operating costs relating to Trading Activities (excluding 
amortisation and depreciation) in the year more than doubled 
from the comparative period to £28.5m (2015: £13.7m),  
with £11.4m of the increase coming from the newly created 
Advanced Animal Nutrition division. Headcount increased  
from 402 at the start of the year to 884 principally through 
the INVE acquisition. The remainder of the increase in 
operating costs reflects the inclusion of financial year 2015 
acquisitions for a full year and increased activity within the 
Animal Health division.

Central operating costs have decreased from £4.9m in 2015 
to £4.3m. This decrease reflects the better efficiency that the 
enlarged Group can achieve through increased scale and the 
impact of continued strong cost control.

As a result of the above factors EBITDA from Trading Activities 
of £22.3m was up on the previous year (2015: £2.4m).

Further commentary on divisional results is provided on  
pages 53 to 55.

The consideration for INVE was denominated in USD, 
US$50m was drawn to part fund the purchase of INVE 
followed by a further US$5m and £5m — both of which were 
repaid during the year. A foreign exchange loss of £5.0m 
arose due to the movement in exchange rates and has  
been included within finance costs.

Taxation

There was a tax credit in the period of £4.0m (2015: charge 
£0.4m). Overseas tax charges in the Advanced Animal Nutrition 
division were more than offset by deferred tax credits on the 
reversal of temporary differences, particularly those arising 
on the intangible assets arising on consolidation from recent 
acquisitions. In particular, a deferred tax liability of £50.1m 
arose on the intangible assets acquired with INVE during the 
year. The deferred tax credit for the year relating to those 
acquired intangible assets was £4.1m. No deferred tax assets 
have been recognised on the losses incurred in the year 
except where there is certainty over the timing of their recovery.

Investing Activities

Earnings per share

Expensed R&D expenditure, one of the Group’s key  
investment objectives, increased significantly to £11.7m 
(2015: £6.6m) in the year as a result of the Group’s strategy 
to invest in technology solutions for food animal producers. 
The acquisition of INVE contributed £1.3m to the year on year 
increase as it also has a core focus on innovation to drive 
future growth. Overall spend was in line with expectations and 
R&D as a percentage of sales fell to 10.7% (2015: 14.9%).

Pre-operational expenses in the year of £1.4m (2015: £1.6m) 
relate primarily to the results of the FAI Aquaculture business 
which was undergoing the final stages of a substantial 
refurbishment. The Ardtoe site was unveiled in May 2016 
and became fully operational at the end of the year. It will 
provide trials facilities to the Benchmark Group that will help 
to advance new product launches. The new FVG laboratories 
in Chile and Brazil are also included within pre-operational 
expenditure and are nearing completion.

Significant acquisition related costs of £12.9m (2015: £1.3m) 
were incurred in the year principally in respect of the acquisition 
of INVE and the associated fund raising. This acquisition was 
considerably larger than all of the acquisitions completed in 
2015 and hence costs were higher.

Exceptional non-recurring costs of £0.1m (2015: £0.2m) 
related to the completion of the restructuring exercise 
undertaken on the Sustainability Science division which  
began in 2015.

Depreciation and amortisation at £16.6m in the year 
(2015: £4.3m) was higher than in previous years due to the 
significant increase in tangible and intangible fixed assets 
balances following the increased investment in the year and 
during the previous year, primarily from the acquisition of 
INVE. Amortisation of intangibles was £13.7m in the year.

Finance costs

Net finance costs of £2.2m (2015: net finance income of 
£0.2m) reflect the fact that a multi-currency revolving credit 
facility of up to $70m was put in place in December 2015. 
This facility incurs interest in the range of 1.9% to 2.5%  
above LIBOR depending on leverage.

Basic loss and diluted loss per share were both 4.4p  
(2015: loss per share 6.0p). The movement year on year 
is due to a combination of the result for the year as noted 
above, and the issue of new shares in the equity raise used 
to fund the acquisition of INVE and the subsequent fund raise 
later in the year. Earnings per share from Trading Activities 
rose to 1.8p (2015: loss per share 1.1p) with the movement 
due to an improved result coupled with the dilutive effect of 
the higher number of shares in issue.

Dividends

No dividends have been paid or proposed in the year (2015: £nil).

Balance sheet

Group net assets increased in the year to £367.7m (2015: 
£92.1m), with the main increase arising from the equity raises 
in the year. Gross proceeds from the first raise used to fund 
the acquisition of INVE were £185.7m and £4.4m of costs 
related to the equity raise were netted off the share premium 
account. In addition, a further equity issue was completed in 
August 2016 raising gross proceeds of £30.7m.

Intangible assets have increased in the year to £352.5m 
(2015: £65.9m). Note 31 to the accounts outlines the fair 
value of the assets and liabilities acquired in the acquisitions 
made during the year. These include separately identifiable 
intangible assets of £147.6m relating to INVE’s intellectual 
property, contracts, licences and customer lists. Deferred tax 
liabilities totalling £50.1m were provided for the tax timing 
differences on these intangible assets. Goodwill of £102.9m 
arose on the acquisition and reflects the synergies available 
from combining INVE with Benchmark. There was a further 
increase of £47.6m in the net book value of intangible assets 
due to the movement in foreign exchange rates in the period, 
as those which were acquired in overseas acquisitions were 
revalued to the year end exchange rates.

Tangible fixed assets have increased by £24.8m to £50.0m 
in the year. Other than those assets acquired with INVE, the 
main investment has been in the new vaccine manufacturing 
plant in Braintree, Essex, together with the investment in trials 
facilities at FAI Aquaculture’s site in Ardtoe, Scotland. 

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Cash flow

Net cash flow from operations was an outflow of £10.5m (2015: 
outflow £9.0m) due to the increased working capital demands 
of the enlarged Group which offset cash inflow before working 
capital adjustments of £3.7m (2015: cash outflow £8.2m). 

Cashflows were dominated by the proceeds of the two 
share placings in the year, with a total of £211.8m net of 
costs being received. £181.3m of this was used to fund the 

Group Revenue

2016

2015

£44.2m

£109.4m

acquisition of INVE, together with some of the receipts from 
the new debt facility entered into in December 2015, with 
total cash inflow from proceeds of the bank borrowings of 
£42.3m. The balance of the INVE purchase price was settled 
by the issue of new shares. 

The rest of the proceeds from share placings is being used 
to fund a number of strategically important projects including 
investment in a partnership that is constructing a new salmon 
egg production facility in Norway and the acquisition of the 
shrimp breeding programme in South America. The majority of 
the funds from this share issue remained on deposit with the 
Company’s bankers at the year end.

Cash outflow on capital expenditure in the year was £18.7m 
as investment in expanded capacity at Braintree and Ardtoe 
nears completion (2015: £14.0m).

Cash at the period end stood at £38.1m (2015: £13.6m) and 
borrowings drawn under the revolving credit facility, net of debt 
raising costs, and finance leases stood at £37.7m giving the 
Group a net cash position of £0.4m.

Group Revenue by Division

120

100

80

60

40

20

m
£

3.7

1.1

44.2

4.8

55.0

0.7

-0.3

109.4

Treasury

The Group has established procedures to mitigate  
financial risk to ensure sufficient liquidity is available to 
meet foreseeable requirements. These ensure that finance 
is secured at minimum cost where required and that cash 
assets are invested securely and profitably. The finance 
function manages the Group’s foreign exchange, liquidity and 
funding, interest rate and credit risks within a framework of 
policies and guidelines authorised by the Board.

0

2 0 1 5 R evenue

Advanced Anim al N utrition
Breeding and G enetics
Anim al H ealth
Other Divisions*

C orporate

2 0 1 6 R evenue
Intra-Group Eliminations

* Sustainability Science Division and Technical Publishing Division

Group Trading EBITDA by Division

1.9

-0.8

22.3

17.1

25

20

15

10

5

m
£

2.3

0.4

-1.0

2.4

0

Other Divisions*
Breeding and G enetics
Anim al H ealth
Advanced Anim al N utrition
2 0 1 5 Trading E BIT D A

2 0 1 6 Trading E BIT D A
Intra-Group Eliminations
C orporate

* Sustainability Science Division and Technical Publishing Division

Group EBITDA from Trading Activities

2016

2015

£2.4m

£22.3m

Reconciliation of Group Loss before Tax 
to Group EBITDA from Trading Activities

11.7

0.1

22.3

16.6

1.4

25

20

15

10

5

0

-5

-10

-15

-20

m
£

-22.4

12.9

2.2

-0.3

-25

N et Finance C osts 
Pre-operational Ventures
Trading E BIT D A
Acquisition R elated C osts
Loss B efore Tax
D epreciation & A m ortisation
S hare of Profit of Associate
Exceptional Ite m s
R & D Expenditure

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

51

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

The Group uses simple derivative financial instruments  
for risk management purposes only. Group policy prohibits 
speculative arrangements. Transactions in financial instruments 
are always matched to an underlying business requirement, 
such as expected foreign currency revenues and payments. 
The Group uses derivatives only to manage its foreign 
currency and interest rate risks arising from underlying 
business activities. No such derivatives were outstanding  
at the year end. Treasury activities are reported to the Board 
on a monthly basis within the Group management accounts.

Foreign exchange risk

The Group’s reporting currency is pounds sterling. Where 
group entities operate with a different functional currency, 
the Group’s policy is, where possible, to allow group entities 
to settle liabilities denominated in their functional currency 
with the cash generated from their own operations in that 
currency. Where group entities have liabilities denominated 
in a currency other than their functional currency (and have 
insufficient reserves of that currency to settle them), cash 
already denominated in that currency will, where possible,  
be transferred from elsewhere within the Group.

Where significant transactions are conducted in currencies 
other than the functional currencies of the individual entities, 
exposure to movements in exchange rate is mitigated by the 
use of simple financial derivative instruments as appropriate.

Liquidity and funding

FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE

The Group’s finance function is responsible for sourcing  
and structuring borrowing requirements. The Group began  
the year with no bank borrowings and, as a result of the 
revolving credit facility first drawn in December 2015, had 
£37.1m in bank borrowings at the end of the year. The 
new facility has a maximum drawdown of US$70m leaving 
sufficient funding facilities (£15.4m at 30 September 2016) 
to meet its normal funding requirements in the medium term.

Interest rate management

Controls over interest rate exposure are in place and dealings 
are restricted to those banks with the necessary combination 
of geographic presence and suitable credit rating.

Credit risk

The policy followed in managing credit risk permits only 
minimal exposures, with any surplus funds invested mainly 
in short-term deposits with financial institutions that meet 
credit criteria approved by the Board. Specifically, counterparty 
creditworthiness is determined by reference to credit ratings  
as defined by the global rating agencies: Fitch, Standard & 
Poor’s and Moody’s.

Advanced Animal Nutrition Division

Breeding and Genetics Division

The Breeding and Genetics division experienced difficult 
trading conditions for sales of salmon eggs in the year as  
a result of the closure of the Chilean border to Icelandic eggs 
at the start of the year, lower stocking in the Chilean industry 
in response to environmental challenges. The revenues lost 
as a result of these factors were offset by the impact of a full 
year’s trade, and overall, revenues for the division increased 
to £20.7m (2015: £15.9m). The integration of the division’s 
tilapia breeding business, Spring Genetics, was completed 
and its sales grew from £0.2m to £0.5m. The division’s 
aquaculture genetics advisory business, AFGC, achieved 
growth in revenue of £1.4m. The addition of shrimp breeding 
through the acquisition of Genética Spring in August 2016 
had limited impact on the division’s results for the year. 

EBITDA from Trading Activities fell by £1.1m to £3.6m  
(2015: £4.7m).

The division has performed well, with sales of £55.0m and 
EBITDA from Trading Activities at £17.1m for the nine months 
post acquisition of INVE. Sales of core live feed products 
(artemia) were strong and selling prices were resilient. 
Market prices for raw material sourced in Asia increased 
and this resulted in some erosion of gross profit percentage. 
Adverse conditions in the main shrimp markets linked to: 
the drought caused by El Niño during H1; disease challenges 
for customers; and the strong US Dollar, resulted in lower 
volume of sales of replacement diets. Gross profit percentage 
for these products remained stable. These adverse impacts 
on sales and margin were partially offset by the favourable 
GBP:USD exchange rate (arising after the UK’s decision to exit 
the EU) when converting the financial results of the division. 
Operating costs relating to Trading Activities (20.6% of sales) 
were managed carefully with some increase in payroll and 
other employee related expenses as a result of the strategy  
to continue to grow by implementing three business initiatives: 
implement key accounts approach (China and Asia); accelerate 
the penetration in the farm and grow-out segment; and gain  
a market leading position in fish hatcheries (Asia).

Expensed R&D costs were £1.3m and capitalised R&D was 
£0.7m reflecting increased investment for supporting the 
above growth initiatives.

Basic EPS from Trading Activities

Group Cashflow 2016

2.3

1.8

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

0.0

(0.5)

(1.0)

e
c
n
e
P

-1.1

0.6

(1.5)

B asic EP S fro m 
Trading Activities 2 0 1 5

Im pact of Increased
Im pact of Increased
N o. of S hares

Earnings

B asic EP S fro m  Trading
Activities 2 0 1 6

-6.0

-4.4

3.1

-1.5

Basic EPS

0

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

e
c
n
e
P

-7

B asic EP S 2 0 1 5

Im pact of Increased
Im pact of R educed
N o. of S hares
Earnings

B asic EP S 2 0 1 6

211.8

-191.5

Advanced Animal Nutrition Division Revenue

Breeding and Genetics Division Revenue

2016

2015

£55.0m

2016

2015

£20.7m

£15.9m

33.3 -18.5

-1.5 -2.2 38.1

-10.5

3.7

13.6

Advanced Animal Nutrition Division 
EBITDA from Trading Activities

Breeding and Genetics Division 
EBITDA from Trading Activities

2016

2015

£17.1m

2016

2015

£3.6m

£4.7m

m
£

250

200

150

100

50

0

N et Proceeds fro m B ank B orro wings
C ashflo w fro m O perations
Acquisition of S ubsidiary
N et Proceeds of S hare Issue
G ain on foreign exchange forw ard contract
2 0 1 5 Closing B alance
Property, Plant & Equip m ent
Interest Paid/R eceived
Investm ent in R & D (capitalised)
2 0 1 6 Closing B alance

Net assets

2016

2015

£92.1m

£367.7m

Summary Income Statement

Revenue

Cost of Sales

Gross Profit

2016 
£m

55.0 

Summary Income Statement

Revenue

(26.5)

Cost of Sales

28.5 

Gross Profit

Operating costs relating to Trading Activities

EBITDA (from Trading Activities)

Operating costs relating to Investing Activities

Depreciation and amortisation

Operating profit

(11.4)

17.1 

(1.2)

(11.4)

4.5 

Operating costs relating  
to Trading Activities

EBITDA (from Trading Activities)

Operating costs relating to 
Investing Activities

Depreciation and amortisation

Operating profit

2016 
£m

20.7 

(13.5)

7.2 

(3.6)

3.6 

(4.6)

(2.6)

(3.6)

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

2015 
£m

15.9 

(9.9)

6.0 

(1.3)

4.7 

(0.2)

(1.4)

3.1 

53

Animal Health Division

The division’s pipeline of new technologies and products 
remains its key focus, and first sales of a new Nodavirus 
vaccine for sea bass were made in July 2016.

The Animal Health division achieved significant improvement 
in year on year sales of Salmosan/Byelice with total revenue 
up on last year by 18%. 2015 sales were impacted by generic 
competition and the 2016 recovery is as a result of targeted 
sales activity by Benchmark’s technical team. It should be 
noted that demand for Salmosan is expected to reduce over 
time as the product continues through its life cycle, as a result 
of generic competition and as new solutions to the sea lice 
challenge become available to the industry. 

EBITDA from Trading Activities for the division was a profit  
of £4.5m (2015: £2.1m). 

Expensed R&D costs (including amortisation and depreciation 
of acquired R&D assets) of £8.7m have been invested in the 
product pipeline in the period (2015: £5.5m). This year for the 
first time the criteria for capitalising development costs have 
been met and £0.8m has been capitalised in respect of new 
products which are in the trial stages.

Animal Health Division Revenue

Factored Products Revenue

2016

2015

£24.8m

£21.1m

2016

2015

£3.3m

£3.6m

Animal Health Division 
EBITDA from Trading Activities

2016

2015

£2.1m

Manufacturing Revenue

2016

2015

Own Products Revenue

2016

2015

£10.2m

Fish Vet Group Services Revenue

£4.5m

2016

2015

£1.0m

£0.8m

£3.5m

£3.5m

£16.4m

Summary Income Statement

Revenue

Cost of Sales

Gross Profit

Operating costs relating  
to Trading Activities

EBITDA (from Trading Activities)

Operating costs relating to 
Investing Activities

Depreciation and amortisation

Operating loss

2016 
£m

24.8 

(15.0)

9.8 

(5.3)

4.5 

(9.0)

(1.5)

(6.0)

2015 
£m

21.1 

(14.5)

6.6 

(4.5)

2.1 

(6.1)

(1.9)

(5.9)

Sustainability Science and  
Technical Publishing Divisions 

The knowledge services divisions of Benchmark had a solid 
year following internal reorganisation and delivered sales of 
£11.2m (2015: £10.1m) and EBITDA from Trading Activities  
of £0.2m (2015: EBITDA loss of £0.2m).

Sustainability Science and 
Technical Publishing Divisions Revenue

2016

2015

£11.2m

£10.1m

Sustainability Science and Technical Publishing 
Divisions EBITDA from Trading Activities

2016

£0.2m

-£0.2m

2015

Summary Income Statement

Revenue

Cost of Sales

Gross Profit

Operating costs relating to 
Trading Activities

EBITDA (from Trading Activities)

Operating costs relating to 
Investing Activities

Depreciation and amortisation

Operating loss

2016 
£m

11.2

(7.0)

4.2

(4.0)

0.2

(1.6)

(1.0)

(2.4)

2015 
£m

10.1

(6.9)

3.2

(3.4)

(0.2)

(0.2)

(1.0)

(1.4) 

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

55

RISK MANAGEMENT

Approach to risk management

The Group recognises that taking risks is an inherent part 
of doing business and that competitive advantage can be 
gained through effectively managing risk. The Group continues 
to develop risk management processes, integrating risk 
management into business decision-making. The Group’s 
approach to risk management is set out in the diagram below, 
and areas of focus during the year are discussed. The principal 
risks and uncertainties, together with their potential impacts, 
are set out in the tables below along with an illustration of 
what is being done to mitigate them.

The Board is responsible for ensuring that the Company has in 
place effective procedures for the management of risk, and that 
the principal risks faced by the Group are identified, assessed, 
appropriately mitigated and monitored. The Audit Committee 
reviews the effectiveness of the Company’s risk management 
and internal control procedures on behalf of the Board. 

The diagram below sets out the key elements of the 
Company’s risk management framework. 

Bottom-up risk review

Risks are identified in a bottom-up process 
involving local management, resulting in  
a risk register for each business. 

PLC risk register

Risks capable of having  
an effect at Group level are 
identified and prioritised.

I

D
E
N
T
I
F
I

C
A
T
I

O
N

M
O
N

I
T
O
R

I

N
G

Ongoing monitoring and review

There is a continual process of updating 
risk registers, incorporating newly acquired 
businesses into the process, reviewing risk 
appetite, and monitoring the implementation 
of mitigation strategies. 

A
S
S
E
S
S
M
E
N
T

A
N
D

E
V
A
L
U
A
T
I

O
N

Risk weighting

Risks are assessed to give a gross risk 
weighting, taking into account likelihood of 
occurrence and severity of impact, and a net 
risk weighting, which also takes into account 
existing mitigating factors and controls. 

Risk exposure

The risk exposure (net risk weighting)  
is evaluated and it is determined whether 
the relevant risk is within the Company’s  
risk appetite.

Actions

Risk appetite

M

I
T
I

G
A
T
I

O
N

Where risk exposure is outside risk 
appetite, actions are agreed and 
implemented, with priority given to risks 
capable of having an effect at Group 
level and risks outside risk tolerance. 

The Company’s risk appetite, which 
varies depending on the type of risk, 
is determined. 

The risk tolerance limit, which allows 
for a level of deviation from risk 
appetite where warranted to achieve 
objectives, and risk capacity, which 
is the level of risk that the Group is 
able to handle, are also evaluated.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Areas of focus

In 2015, a bottom-up risk review was concluded, under the 
guidance of the Chief Financial Officer and an independent 
risk adviser, which resulted in the creation of a risk register 
for each business. Risks were categorised as strategic, 
operational, financial, human, legal/regulatory, or asset,  
and were given a weighting, having regard to the likelihood  
of occurrence, severity of impact and existing mitigating 
factors and controls. A PLC Risk Register was created,  
which identified and assessed the risks capable of having  
an impact at Group level, and commented on existing 
mitigating factors and controls. 

During the year, the Company reassessed its risk appetite. 
The Board agreed on a risk appetite statement applicable to 
the Group as a whole, which articulates the Group’s overall 
willingness to take risks (set out below). 

The Board also reviewed a more detailed risk appetite  
matrix, which sets out the Group’s appetite for risk in key 
areas relevant to the business. The Board received an 
overview of the Group’s risk profile, which evaluated each 
business against various risk categories, and identified 
significant risks and areas requiring focus.

The Group has repeated the bottom-up risk review and 
reviewed the PLC Risk Register to ensure that these remain 
current and takes into account newly acquired companies 
and developments in the business. A programme is ongoing, 
at both PLC and local level, to identify where risk exposure is 
outside appetite, and to develop a plan to mitigate or control 
such situations. 

Risk appetite statement

Benchmark Holdings plc, operating as it does in a highly 
regulated sector involving significant interaction with living 
organisms, has a very low tolerance to risks of breaching 
legal, regulatory or ethical standards or anything which 
could negatively impact on our reputation. The nature of 
our business means that we can be impacted by biological 
or climatic effects which are beyond our influence and so 
where possible, we take steps to mitigate these impacts on 
the business. We use our knowledge of fundamental biology 
to develop products that tackle unsolved problems often by 
applying new technology. We are mindful of our stakeholder 
requirements and so will take measured risk with regards to 
the integrity of our product pipeline and intellectual assets. 

We recognise that our people are one of our greatest assets 
and the Group encourages their long-term commitment allowing 
them to progress and achieve success. Failure to leverage 
value through collaborative working and cooperation between 
our Divisions is not a risk we are prepared to accept and the 
Group has the management structure in place to continue 
to deliver this particular goal. Where we believe that actions 
will be beneficial to the Group and its stakeholders, such as 
specific projects or acquisitions, then we will be willing to take 
more risk relative to the potential rewards on offer.

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

57

 
 
STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES

Risk Category

Risks and uncertainty 

Mitigating factors 

Opportunities

Risk Category Risks and uncertainty 

Mitigating factors 

Opportunities

Legal and 
Regulatory —
Licences and 
accreditations

Legal and 
Regulatory —
Intellectual  
assets

Failure to obtain or retain licences for key existing or 
new products, R&D facilities 1:1048576 production 
sites could lead to reduced sales or restrictions on 
sales growth.

The Group employs high calibre teams in regulatory 
affairs, quality control and customer technical support 
who manage the licence application process and 
ensure compliance with existing licence conditions.

The knowledge of our people is a key asset 
and the need for a high calibre team to 
handle regulated products and processes is 
a barrier to entry for potential competitors.

Risk of legal challenge to the Group’s intellectual 
property leading to potentially significant costs being 
incurred in the defence of Group IP or defending 
against third party accusations that the Group breached 
third party IP. A failed defence could lead to the loss 
of a product and/or compensatory awards.

The Group employs an in-house legal team including 
an IP specialist. This is combined with retained 
external specialist advisers. Benchmark applies 
a rigorous process to appraise the IP in all new 
products and adopts a policy to vigorously defend  
or negotiate all claims arising.

In house resource enables long-term strategic 
focus on efficient protection of IP which in 
turn protects future revenue streams.

Access to rights to commercialise some pipeline 
products developed in collaboration with 
universities or other third parties are yet to be 
negotiated and there is a risk that the Group may 
not be able to launch these products or may have  
to agree to less favourable terms in order to do so.

Operational — 
Products

The Group is reliant on the continued success  
of its research and development programmes  
for aquaculture and the commercial success  
of its pipeline products. An unexpectedly high  
new product development failure rate or delay  
in reaching market would delay revenue growth.

A system for monitoring the contractual and IP 
position of pipeline products has been developed 
and this is operated in parallel with systems for 
monitoring status of product development. The Group 
has expanded the in-house legal team to include 
an IP manager who works closely with the product 
development team.

The Group has a high calibre team of animal 
health product development specialists covering 
all stages of the process to market. Some new 
products in development involve collaboration with 
specialist partners and often present a lower risk 
as the Group can leverage the partner's existing 
development work. Rigorous proof of concept studies 
are undertaken at an early stage in order to seek to 
minimise the possibility of failure.

Further focus on this area will provide 
opportunities to improve terms for future 
product development collaborations.

This approach to product development 
tends to enable the Group to access a 
wider portfolio of potential solutions to 
identified market needs and often allows 
accelerated progress to market launch.

Development of resistance to some existing 
products would lead to reduced efficacy.

The Group has deployed a technical support team to 
provide customers with regular advice and training on 
the proper use of its products. There is a particular 
focus on good stock management and avoiding over-use.

Correct management of product efficacy 
presents an opportunity to provide a 
package of solutions that enable better 
long-term disease management.

Operational — 
Supply chain

Delayed launch or under-utilisation of laboratory, 
manufacturing or R&D facilities resulting in reduced 
return on investment.

Reliance on third parties to provide some raw 
materials and manufacturing services could lead to 
restrictions in supply.

New capital projects are supervised by an experienced 
project manager working with an in-house project 
team and supplemented by retained specialist 
consultants and advisors. The Group's new product 
pipeline will provide significant utilisation of group 
manufacturing capacity in the future. External 
manufacturing contracts are also available. 

Wherever possible dual suppliers of key raw materials, 
components and manufacturing services are engaged 
on a contracted basis. In addition the group continually 
evaluates the security of the supply chain for each of 
its products and will consider establishing in house 
manufacturing where there is a high risk. The Group 
will also increase stock holding where appropriate in 
order to mitigate the risk of product shortages.

Having in-house manufacturing provides 
security of supply and protects important 
IP that is developed in the manufacturing 
process. Laboratories provide brand 
penetration into the key aquaculture markets.

Where dual supply is achieved this presents 
opportunities for cost saving and also to 
encourage collaboration. Where in house 
manufacturing is the preferred approach 
this can present opportunities to generate 
revenues from providing manufacturing 
services to third parties.

Disease outbreaks at sites with breeding 
programmes or live stocks could result in reduced 
revenues, reputational damage and potential 
product liability claims.

Group breeding facilities operate high standards of 
biosecurity, quality control and quality assurance. In 
particular StofnFiskur’s location in Iceland provides 
some of the best resources for disease free production. 

Consistent disease free production results 
in increased customer confidence and the 
potential to expand sales.

Human —  
People

Failure to recruit, retain or replace employees  
with skills key to the success of the business.

Benchmark is involved in production environments 
and there is a risk of injury or death to employees. 
This could lead to legal action and, as a consequence, 
reputational and financial damage to the Group.

Asset risk —  
Assets and 
business 
interruption

Damage to Group assets could result in loss of  
key breeding or manufacturing capacity coupled  
with long lasting consequential losses including  
loss of customers.

Key systems or IT Infrastructure failure could lead 
to temporary or permanent loss of data resulting 
in lost IP, delays to product launches, reduced 
production capacity, delays to financial reporting, etc.

Strategic — 
Reputational

Failure of a Group product could cause third party 
loss or damage resulting in potential legal action, 
loss of confidence in product, damaged reputation 
and reduced sales. There is risk of one entity 
suffering reputational damage that then spreads to 
other associated group companies.

Strategic — 
Synergies

One of the Group’s key strategies is to extract 
synergies between operating divisions and failure to 
manage this effectively could inhibit growth.

Benchmark has a centralised People team with a 
core understanding of group requirements backed 
up by a People Strategy. The Operations Board 
is involved in all key hires and in developing and 
implementing policy. The Group's Divisions have 
established management teams and a substantial 
degree of autonomy meaning that potential problems 
with succession are reduced. 

Health and Safety is a priority matter for the plc 
board and a new senior post of Health and Safety 
manager was created in 2016. This senior post 
reports to the board and the manager has launched 
new policies, implemented priority safety measures 
and improved monitoring and reporting. 

Regular safety inspections are undertaken to assess 
the risk of fire, security, etc. and integrated alarm 
systems are installed wherever possible. Tenure 
at key sites is generally secured through freehold 
ownership or long leasehold. The Group is improving 
safety standards at all sites and constructing 
alternative production facilities where return on 
investment can be demonstrated.

Benchmark employs a centralised IT team with an IT 
strategy in place that has security at its centre. This 
includes implementation of key security systems like 
single sign on. The Group utilises a mix of in house 
and outsourced solutions to ensure systems are 
robust and data is secure.

Benchmark employs rigorous quality control, quality 
assurance and pharmacovigilance practices. The 
Group provides a high level of technical support 
and training to customers in order to ensure correct 
use of products. Any issues arising would be 
discussed at the Operations Board ensuring a swift 
group response and this would include the group’s 
centralised communications team.

Management of the Group is structured to maximise 
focus on synergies and the senior team have this 
as a key priority. In addition, one of the founding 
principles of the group’s ethos is to encourage 
collaborative working.

Benchmark has a high staff retention  
rate which supports the Group’s strong 
culture and ensures consistent delivery  
of its strategy.

The launch of alternative manufacturing 
facilities provides significant additional 
production capacity.

Properly controlled use of IT systems 
enables faster and wider collaboration, 
especially for an international business  
like Benchmark.

Efficient protection of reputation results 
in high levels of customer confidence 
and hence supports opportunities for 
collaboration and growth.

Effective collaboration drives progress faster 
and opens further opportunities for growth.

The Strategic Report was approved by the Board on 24 January 2017 and signed on its behalf by

Financial

Limited diversity of revenue streams presents a risk 
of volatility in sales.

The Group's pipeline of new products is anticipated 
to deliver an increasing number of launches in both 
existing and new markets. Benchmark's offering of a 
package of solutions and technical support promotes 
customer retention and reduces volatility in orders.

The Group is fast building a strong position 
as a key technology solutions provider to 
the global aquaculture industry across 
multiple species and this brings new 
opportunities at an increasing pace.

Malcolm Pye 
Chief Executive Officer

The Group is exposed to risks associated with 
currency exchange rates. This impacts sales 
volumes where products are priced in US dollars 
but sold in local currency and impacts reported 
results when local results, assets and liabilities are 
converted to GB pounds.

Substantial natural hedging is achieved by  
matching currency cash flows and through  
borrowings in US dollars. A treasury policy is  
in place to ensure that currency outflows that  
cannot be matched internally are hedged when  
there is certainty of amount and timing.

Debt facilities include financial covenants which, 
if breached, could lead to reclassification of debt 
as ‘within one year’ and to the requirement to 
refinance on uncertain terms.

The Group's customers are susceptible to the 
impact of climatic conditions on their livestock and 
hence their profitability. This may cause short-term 
unpredictability in Benchmark's trading and in 
anticipated growth in revenues.

Financial covenants are set with appropriate 
headroom and regular reforecasting enables 
advanced monitoring of compliance. Proactive 
management of the relationship with banking 
partners based on track record of delivery and  
a spirit of openess and early engagement would 
assist if amendments to covenants were required.

Consider the potential range of consequences of 
adverse conditions when preparing financial projections. 
Monitor climatic data and market intelligence.

Climatic conditions often impact the 
performance of livestock and can promote 
new or heightened disease challenge,  
which presents Benchmark with the 
opportunity to apply its technology to  
solve these new problems.

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Strategic Report

59

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

02 
Governance

62 

Introduction to the Board

64 

 Leadership

68  Effectiveness

70  Accountability

74  Remuneration

79  Shareholders

79  Directors’ Report

83 

 Directors’ Responsibility 
Statement

INTRODUCTION   
TO THE BOARD

Board of Directors  
and Company Secretary

Malcolm Pye — Chief Executive Officer

Appointed: November 2000

Skills, competence and experience: Malcolm has over 30 years’ experience in international 
agribusiness through his roles within the Hillsdown Holdings/HMTF group, operating in animal 
breeding, poultry, feed milling and veterinary services. During this time, Malcolm gained 
extensive experience in breeding and genetics, sales and strategic M&A, and held board 
positions within the Group. In 2000, Malcolm founded Benchmark, along with Roland Bonney 
and Ruth Layton, and has since led the Company’s growth and diversification. Malcolm has  
a degree in Zoology/Applied Zoology from the University of Wales (Bangor).

Roland Bonney — Chief Operating Officer

Appointed: November 2000

Skills, competence and experience: Roland is an experienced agriculturalist, having founded 
businesses in large-scale farming and food chain development consultancy serving global food 
retailers. Roland has extensive experience in international business development, particularly 
in the US, Latin American and Chinese markets. Roland was one of the three founders of 
Benchmark, and has since led the Company’s operations, working with management teams to 
identify and implement opportunities for improvement and optimise use of resources, as well  
as leading the Company’s communications and people strategies.

Mark Plampin — Chief Financial Officer

Appointed: March 2010

Skills, competence and experience: Mark is a qualified Chartered Certified Accountant with  
over 20 years’ experience. Mark joined Benchmark in 2010 from PKF (UK) LLP (now BDO LLP), 
where he was a Partner and National Chairman of the Food Sector Group. Mark’s experience 
at PKF was focussed on corporate finance, including leading on M&A and the strategic 
development of high-growth small and mid-market businesses.

Alex Hambro — Non-Executive Chairman

Nomination Committee (Chair) — Audit Committee

Appointed: December 2013

Skills, competence and experience: Alex has operated in the private equity industry, both in 
the UK and USA, for over 25 years. He has acted as principal investor, manager and sponsor 
of private equity and venture capital management teams, and adviser to professional private 
clients. Alex managed the venture capital and private equity fund investment portfolio for 
Hambros plc, prior to its sale to Société Générale in 1998. Alex was also a founding Director  
of both Crescent Capital, a venture capital fund management team based in Belfast, and 
Judges Scientific plc, a scientific instrument manufacturing group. 

Other roles: Chair of Judges Scientific plc; Chair of Crescent Capital NI Limited; Non-Executive 
Director of Octopus Apollo VCT plc; Non-Executive Director of BACIT (UK) Ltd; Non-Executive 
Director Bapco Closures; Non-Executive Director Whitley Asset Management; Non-Executive 
Director First Magazine Ltd.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Susan Searle — Senior Independent Director

Remuneration Committee (Chair) — Nomination Committee 

Appointed: December 2013

Skills, competence and experience: Susan has over 20 years’ experience working with 
entrepreneurs and academic inventors in the commercialisation of university research. Susan 
co-founded Imperial Innovations Group plc, now one of the world’s leading technology venture 
investment businesses, and was the group’s Chief Executive Officer from 2002 to 2013. 
Previously, Susan held roles in sales, marketing, operations and manufacturing in various 
industries including chemicals, precious metals and retail. Susan holds an MA in Chemistry 
from Exeter College, Oxford.

Other roles: Chair of Woodford Patient Capital PLC; Chair of Mercia Technologies PLC; Senior 
Independent Director and Non-executive Director of Horizon Discovery Group plc; Non-Executive 
Director of QinetiQ Group plc.

Kevin Quinn — Non-Executive Director

Audit Committee (Chair) — Remuneration Committee 

Appointed: November 2016

Skills, competence and experience: Kevin is a qualified Chartered Accountant with over 30 years 
of financial experience in international business and the biosciences industry, including with 
FTSE 100 companies. Kevin has, for the past 11 years, been Chief Financial Officer at Berendsen 
plc, the leading FTSE 250 European textile service business. Previously, Kevin held senior 
finance positions within biosciences group Amersham plc and before that was a partner with 
PricewaterhouseCoopers (Prague). Kevin holds a BA in French from University College, Durham.

Other roles: Chief Financial Officer of Berendsen plc.

Athene Blakeman — Company Secretary & Group Legal Counsel

Appointed: September 2014

Skills, competence and experience: Athene is a qualified Solicitor with over 12 years’ experience. 
Athene previously worked in Slaughter and May and Travers Smith LLP’s corporate finance 
teams, focussing on public company advisory work, M&A, fundraisings, private investments, JVs 
and commercial contracts. Since joining Benchmark, Athene has acted as Company Secretary 
and Group Legal Counsel, with responsibility for the Group’s global legal and IP functions. 
Athene holds an MA in Jurisprudence from St John’s College, Oxford.

Basil Brookes — Non-Executive Director

Audit Committee (Chair) — Remuneration Committee 

Appointed: December 2013

Retired: July 2016

Following a very successful 3-year term as Non-Executive Director, Basil Brookes stepped  
down from the Board in July 2016 for health reasons.

Board Committees

Audit Committee

Kevin Quinn (Chair) 
Alex Hambro

Nomination Committee

Alex Hambro (Chair) 
Susan Searle

Remuneration Committee

Susan Searle (Chair) 
Kevin Quinn

On 29 July 2016, Basil Brookes (Non-Executive Director) stepped down from the Board for health reasons. Basil had been Chair 
of the Audit Committee and a member of the Remuneration Committee. The Board implemented its succession plan and promptly 
commenced a recruitment process to find a Non-Executive Director with appropriate skills and experience to replace Basil, and 
Kevin Quinn was appointed on 25 November 2016. In the interim period, temporary appointments were made to ensure that each 
of the committees maintained an appropriate composition and the requisite experience. Alex Hambro stepped up to Chair the Audit 
Committee, and Susan Searle was appointed on an interim basis to the Audit Committee. Susan Searle remained Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee, and was joined by Alex Hambro who was appointed on an interim basis to the Remuneration Committee.

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Governance

63

LEADERSHIP

Role of the Board

Strategic decisions

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Governance framework

Benchmark operates a clear governance framework, which is 
outlined in the diagram below and described in this report.

The Company complies with the principles of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code (the Code). An overview of the Company’s 
compliance with the Code is set out in the Directors’ Report 
on pages 79 to 83. 

Board of Directors of  
Benchmark Holdings plc

Alex Hambro (Chair)  
Susan Searle (Senior Independent Director) 
Kevin Quinn (Non-Executive Director) 

Malcolm Pye (Chief Executive Officer) 
Roland Bonney (Chief Operating Officer)  
Mark Plampin (Chief Financial Officer)

Principal objective: Collectively to ensure  
the long-term success of the Company.

Audit Committee

Kevin Quinn (Chair) 
Alex Hambro

Principal objective: To ensure that the interests  
of shareholders are properly protected in relation  
to financial reporting and internal controls.

Nomination Committee

Alex Hambro (Chair) 
Susan Searle

Principal objective: To lead a formal, rigorous and 
transparent process for the appointment of new 
Directors to the Board and its committees.

Benchmark Operations Board

Remuneration Committee

Executive Directors (Malcolm Pye, Roland Bonney, 
Mark Plampin), heads of division, senior management 
of other significant businesses within the Group, 
heads of key support functions.

Principal objective: To facilitate synergistic business 
development, deliver strategic initiatives across the 
Group, and communicate Group strategy.

Susan Searle (Chair) 
Kevin Quinn

Principal objective: To develop policy on  
executive remuneration and set the remuneration  
of the Chairman, Executive Directors and  
senior management. 

Divisional Boards

Executive Director representation, heads of division, 
senior management of all businesses within division.

Principal objective: To develop and deliver strategy 
for the relevant division.

The Board is responsible for the long-term success of the 
Group, overseeing the development and delivery of strategy 
and conduct of the business, to generate sustainable value 
for shareholders. 

The Executive Directors are responsible for the 
implementation of strategy, business operations, risk 
management, and ensuring that the necessary financial  
and people resources are in place to achieve the Company’s 
aims. The primary responsibilities of the Non-Executive 
Directors are to constructively challenge and help develop 
strategy, scrutinise the performance of management, satisfy 
themselves that financial controls and risk management 
systems are robust, determine Directors’ remuneration, 
satisfy themselves regarding the integrity of financial 
information, and succession planning for Executive  
Directors and senior management. 

Each year, the Board holds a Strategy Day to allow for a 
focussed session to discuss the long-term strategy of the 
Group and related matters, including the composition and 
performance of the Board, succession planning, Group and 
management structure, financial resources and funding, and 
people resources and deployment. At this year’s Strategy Day, 
the Board received presentations from the heads of each of 
the Animal Health, Advanced Animal Nutrition and Breeding 
and Genetics Divisions regarding their long-term strategy for 
those divisions, which included an analysis of opportunities 
for growth and proposed investment programmes. The 
Board also dedicates a portion of each Board meeting to 
discussing strategy and its implementation. The Board 
exercises oversight and control over the performance of the 
Company through review of management financial information, 
by agreeing budgetary targets, and by approving investment 
programmes and monitoring their execution against budget 
and returns on investment. In addition, certain decisions 
which are significant to the Group due to their strategic, 
financial or reputational implications are reserved for  
approval by the Board. 

Matters reserved for the Board

The decisions which are significant to the Group due to  
their strategic, financial or reputational implications and  
are reserved for approval by the Board are set out on this 
page. A formal schedule of matters reserved for the Board  
is maintained, and is communicated throughout the Group  
via regular training. 

The matters reserved for the Board were reviewed by the 
Board in 2016. Amendments were made to take account of 
changes in the business as a result of the INVE Acquisition, 
including the introduction of business specific thresholds for 
identifying material decisions.

•  Review and approval of the long-term objectives  

and strategic direction of the Group

•  Approval and monitoring of strategic and annual 

business plans and budget

•  Review of business performance

•  Approval of significant acquisitions, mergers, 

disposals and other transactions

•  Approval of diversification into new business 

activities and new geographies

Reporting

•  Approval of the Annual Report and Accounts  

and of the interim financial statements

•  Oversight and approval of significant changes  

to reporting policies and practices

Regulatory matters

•  Compliance with the AIM Rules for Companies and 
principles of the UK Corporate Governance Code

•  Approval of interim dividends and recommendation 

of final dividends

Finance, governance and controls

•  Review and approval of internal control and  

risk management systems

•  Approval of significant projects, contracts  

and disputes

•  Approval of financing policy including the issue  

of shares and significant borrowings

•  Appointment or removal of the auditors and 

determination of the audit fee

•  Oversight and approval of Directors’ conflicts  

of interests

•  Rules and procedures for regulating dealing in the 
Company’s shares by its employees and Directors

Succession planning and reward

•  Ensuring adequate succession planning is in place

•  Appointments of Directors to the Board and  

its committees

•  Appointment or removal of the Company Secretary

•  Approving and recommending to shareholders the 
terms of employee share schemes, and approving 
significant changes to pension schemes

•  Approval of remuneration of senior management

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Governance

65

Board attendance

During the year, the Board held 11 scheduled Board meetings, and 4 Board meetings on short notice. 
Individual attendance at the scheduled Board meetings is set out below. 

A Board dinner is often held around Board meetings to allow for more informal discussion, and on site 
visits the Board are often joined by local management. 

Attendance

Appointment

Number of scheduled 
meetings attended in FY16

Maximum possible 
scheduled meetings in FY16

% of scheduled meetings 
attended

Alex Hambro, Chair

December 2013

Susan Searle,  
Senior Independent Director

December 2013

Basil Brookes,  
Non-Executive Director1

December 2013  
(resigned July 2016)

Malcolm Pye,  
Chief Executive Officer

Roland Bonney,  
Chief Operating Officer

Mark Plampin,  
Chief Financial Officer

December 2013

December 2013

December 2013

11

11

9

11

11

11

11

11

10

11

11

11

100%

100%

90%

100%

100%

100%

1  Basil Brookes was unable to attend the scheduled Board meeting held on 7 July 2016 for health reasons.

Board activities in the year

At each scheduled Board meeting, the following standing items are considered:

Standing agenda items

•  Notice, quorum, Directors’ duties and any conflicts  

•  Review of BVL Business Development Update, tracking 

of interest

Benchmark Vaccines’ manufacturing pipeline

•  Approval of minutes of previous meeting and review  

•  Consideration of any Matters Reserved for the Board

of action points from previous meetings

•  Review of Management Information Pack, which  

includes monthly group management accounts, outlook, 
cash flow forecast, financial covenant forecast, share  
price performance, shareholder and trading report,  
and monthly headcount 

•  CEO/COO update, comprising an update on  

strategic matters and significant developments  
from the Executive Directors 

•  Review of Capex Project Report, tracking expenditure and 
payback on significant capex investments. In FY16 these 
reports covered the vaccine manufacturing facility at 
Braintree, UK and SalmoBreed Salten

•  Review of Deal Tracker, updating on potential acquisitions, 

licensing deals and other exceptional transactions

•  Review of People Report, summarising vacancies, 
management appointments, and updating on 
implementation of People Team strategy 

•  Review of Health and Safety Report, giving an overview  

of accident and near miss reporting, and tracking Health 
and Safety performance

•  Review of Compliance Report, summarising and  

tracking compliance initiatives and issues, and an update  
on legal, IP, litigation and Company secretarial matters 

•  Review of Communications Report, summarising 
announcements, media coverage, and other  
shareholder events

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

In addition to the standing items, an overview of the principal 
matters considered by the Board in the year is set out below.

Strategy and operations 

•  Discussed the Group’s strategy for FY17, including strategy 
for developing target growth markets and implementation 
of the Group’s key account management programme 

•  Reviewed and approved the Group budget for FY16

•  Received presentations from the heads of each of the 
Advanced Animal Nutrition, Breeding and Genetics and 
Animal Health divisions, including 3-year strategic plans, 
opportunities for growth and investment proposals

•  Received updates on key regulatory developments, 
including new Market Abuse Regulations, Insurance 
Act 2015, gender pay gap reporting and PSC (persons 
exercising significant control) regime 

•  Received training on Directors’ responsibilities from Numis

•  Report from the Chair of the Audit Committee on the  

FY15 audit process and principal matters discussed with 
the auditors

•  Approved the appointment of KPMG as auditors to the 

Company, following a tender process

Shareholders

•  Received presentations from INVE Aquaculture senior 

•  Approved Annual Report and Accounts and interim results 

management following the acquisition, including overview 
of the business, target products and markets, and analysis 
of synergies

•  Received regular reports on integration and synergies, 
including key account management, changes to the 
composition of the Operations Board, and synergistic  
new business development across Animal Health, Breeding 
and Genetics and Advanced Animal Nutrition divisions 

•  Received presentation on big data project, designed  

to utilise big data to generate advanced diagnostic tools 
and improve animal production 

•  Discussed biosecurity and risk mitigation strategy 

in Breeding and Genetics division and proposals for 
broodstock sites 

•  Received regular updates on the closure of the Chilean border 
to salmon eggs from Iceland, as well as algal bloom in Chile 
and drought in Asia, and expected impact on the business

•  Discussed expected effects of Brexit and risk  

mitigation strategies

•  Received presentation on the Sustainability Science 
division, including an overview of the business, and  
plans for restructuring and consolidation, which have  
now been completed

Governance and risk

•  Discussed the effect of currency movements on the 

business, and hedging 

•  Received presentation from Group Health and Safety manager, 

including overview of current situation and strategy 

•  Reviewed results of comprehensive bottom-up risk review 
and recommended actions, including identification and 
mitigation of principal risks capable of having an impact 
at Group level, and overview of Group risk profile using 
weighted scoring (having regard to severity of impact, 
likelihood of occurrence and existing controls) 

•  Reviewed key terms of Group insurance policies 

•  Approved amendments to the Group’s Share Dealing  
Code, in part to reflect implementation of EU Market  
Abuse Regulation 

•  Reviewed and approved amendments to the Matters 
Reserved for the Board, introducing division specific 
thresholds for identifying material decisions 

•  Reviewed the performance of the Company against the  

UK Corporate Governance Code

•  Received feedback from investor meetings held following 
the equity fundraising to fund the acquisition of INVE 
Aquaculture, release of results, and placing 

•  Received presentation from investor relations advisers 
Tavistock on brand development and shareholder 
communications

•  Approved appointment of Numis as NOMAD and Broker. 
Received presentation from Numis, including analysis of 
shareholder base, valuation and peer group analysis 

Research and development

•  Received Pipeline Reports from Benchmark Animal Health 
on a quarterly basis, providing an overview of and updates 
on the product pipeline (from June 2016) 

•  Received presentation from head of the Animal  

Health division on the product development pipeline, 
including its strategic focuses, progress with late-stage  
and significant products, and implementation of a new 
project management system 

Acquisitions, licensing deals and transactions

•  Approved the acquisition of INVE Aquaculture, and related 

equity fundraising and debt facilities

•  Approved licensing deals for Canine Atopic Dermatitis 

vaccine, and Sweet Itch equine vaccine 

•  Approved equity placing to raise £30.7m, to fund 

construction of SalmoBreed, Salten, joint venture with 
major salmon producer, acquisition of specialist shrimp 
breeding programme, investment in product pipeline

People

•  Received presentation from Head of People regarding 

People Team strategy, including attracting and retaining the 
right people, succession planning, leadership development 
and projects to identify and nurture key persons within the 
business, and talent development programme 

•  Discussed, with Head of People present, the culture  

and values of the Group and how these cascade through 
the Group, including the use of induction days and  
vision workshops

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Governance

67

EFFECTIVENESS

Nomination Committee Report

The Nomination Committee is responsible for safeguarding 
the effectiveness of the Board by regularly reviewing its 
composition, and leading a rigorous and transparent process 
for the identification and appointment of new Directors. 

of Conduct for Executive Search Firms in Board Appointments, 
which is designed to address gender and wider diversity on 
Boards. The Zygos Partnership has no other connections with 
the Company. 

Its key responsibilities are:

•  To review the composition of the Board, including its size, 
balance of skills, knowledge, experience and diversity

•  To lead the process for Board appointments and 
recommend the appointment of new Directors

•  To review the re-appointment of Non-Executive Directors

•  To make recommendations on the composition of the 

Board Committees

•  To consider succession for Board members and  

senior management

The Nomination Committee’s terms of reference are  
reviewed annually and a summary of these is available  
on the Corporate Governance section of our website at  
www.benchmarkplc.com.

Composition of Nomination Committee and attendance in the year

Member  
Attendance

Appointment

Number of 
meetings 
attended in 
FY16

Maximum 
possible 
meetings  
in FY16

% of 
meetings 
attended

Alex 
Hambro, 
Chair

Susan 
Searle

December 
2013

December 
2013

2

2

2

2

100%

100%

In addition to the scheduled meetings of the Nomination 
Committee, discussions were held at the Board Strategy Day 
in September 2016 regarding the composition and diversity  
of the Board. 

Only the members of the Nomination Committee have the right 
to attend meetings. The Head of People, other Board members 
and external advisers may be invited to contribute on specified 
agenda items. The Company Secretary acts as a secretary 
to the Nomination Committee. The Nomination Committee 
encourages discussion in the full Board forum of certain of the 
matters for which it is responsible, including the composition 
and diversity of the Board and succession planning.

Nomination Committee activities during the year

The Nomination Committee’s principal focus in FY16 was  
the replacement of Basil Brookes, who retired from the Board 
in July 2016 for health reasons. The Committee ensured that 
a well-defined specification for the new appointment was 
formulated, having regard to the skills, expertise and values 
required to ensure effective functioning of the Board as a 
whole. As well as the financial expertise required to Chair 
the Audit Committee, experience in financial management of 
international business and growth companies was sought. The 
Nomination Committee appointed external search consultants 
The Zygos Partnership to assist with the recruitment process. 
The Zygos Partnership are signatories to the Voluntary Code 

The Nomination Committee also assessed the composition  
of the Board and its committees on an interim basis, including 
the option to appoint an external consultant to advise the 
Audit Committee in the absence of its usual Chair. It was 
determined that Alex Hambro and Susan Searle had sufficient 
skills and experience to cover the vacant roles on a temporary 
basis; Susan sits on the Audit Committee of QinetiQ Group 
plc, and has previously chaired the Audit Committees of both 
Mercia Technologies plc and Horizon Discovery Group plc. 
Accordingly, temporary appointments were made to ensure 
that each of the Board committees maintained an appropriate 
composition and the requisite experience. Alex Hambro 
stepped up to Chair the Audit Committee, and Susan Searle 
was appointed on an interim basis to the Audit Committee. 
Susan Searle remained Chair of the Remuneration Committee, 
and Alex Hambro was appointed on an interim basis to the 
Remuneration Committee. 

Following a successful recruitment process, Kevin Quinn 
was appointed as Non-Executive Director, Chair of the Audit 
Committee and member of the Remuneration Committee,  
in November 2016. 

The Nomination Committee also led discussion at the Board 
Strategy Day regarding the composition of the Board, having 
regard to its recent growth through the acquisition of INVE 
Aquaculture, and increased presence and opportunity in 
global markets. It was recognised that it would be desirable 
to increase Board diversity when the opportunity arose, 
particularly having regard to the international nature of the 
Group’s operations. 

Succession planning for senior management is a focus for 
the Group, and the People Team are leading a programme to 
identify and foster talent within the business, which includes 
the provision of leadership training and development of 
individual success factors. 

Action plan for the coming year

In the coming year, the Nomination Committee intends to:

•  Keep the composition of the Board under review, to ensure 
that its size, balance of skills, knowledge and experience 
remain suitable for the needs of the Group 

•  Undertake a Board evaluation process to review 

performance and seek opportunities for improvement.  
The Board last undertook a self-evaluation process to 
review its composition and performance in 2015 

•  Ensure that, where opportunities arise, the Group’s goal  
to increase diversity at Board and senior management  
level is considered

The Hon Alexander Hambro 
Chairman of the Nomination Committee 
24 January 2017

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Board composition

The Board comprises six Directors; a Non-Executive Chairman, 
Senior Independent Director, further Non-Executive Director, 
and three Executive Directors. 

On 29 July 2016, Basil Brookes (Non-Executive Director) 
stepped down from the Board for health reasons. The Board 
implemented its succession plan and promptly commenced  
a recruitment process to find a Non-Executive Director  
with appropriate skills and experience to replace Basil,  
and Kevin Quinn was appointed on 25 November 2016.  
In the interim period the Board comprised five Directors;  
a Non-Executive Chairman, Senior Independent Director  
and three Executive Directors. All resolutions passed by the 
Board during this interim period in which there were three 
Executive Directors and two independent Non-Executive 
Directors, were passed unanimously.

The size and composition of the Board was reviewed during 
the year by the Nomination Committee and by the Board. 
The Group’s recent growth through the acquisition of INVE 
Aquaculture, and increased presence and opportunity in 
global markets were discussed. The Board determined that 
the composition of the Board remains suitable for the Group, 
and contains an appropriate breadth and balance of skills, 
knowledge, experience and independence. The Board also 
identified that it would be desirable to increase Board diversity 
when the opportunity arose, particularly having regard to the 
international nature of the Group’s operations. 

Directors’ roles and responsibilities 

Biographical details for all members of the Board can be 
found on pages 62 to 63 of this report. 

There is a clear separation between the roles of Chairman  
and Chief Executive Officer.

The role of the Chairman is to:

•  Lead the Board to ensure effective functioning in all 

aspects of its role

•  Promote an open culture of debate

•  Ensure that the membership of the Board is appropriate  

for the needs of the business

•  Oversee Board committees as they carry out their duties, 

including reporting to the Board

•  Set and manage the agenda for Board meetings

•  Establish an environment which allows the recruitment, 
engagement, retention and development of the people 
needed to deliver the Group’s strategy

The Senior Independent Director provides a sounding  
board for the Chairman and serves as an intermediary for  
the other Directors when necessary. The Non-Executive 
Directors meet regularly throughout the year without the 
Executive Directors present.

Induction, business awareness and development

The Chairman is responsible for ensuring that new Directors 
receive a comprehensive and formal induction. This includes:

•  An overview of the Group, its functions and  

governance framework

•  Briefings on Directors’ responsibilities and  

compliance responsibilities

•  Site visits to key Group locations

•  Detailed reviews of the strategic projects and  

initiatives underway

•  One-to-one meetings with senior management

Kevin Quinn was appointed on 25 November 2016 and is 
receiving a formal induction covering the above aspects, with 
a focus on financial matters, as well as meetings with key 
members of the finance team. 

In order that Directors further their understanding of the 
business, its ambitions and the challenges it faces, and are 
able to challenge and help develop strategy constructively, 
Non-Executive Directors are encouraged to visit Group 
locations and have regular opportunities to meet senior 
management. During the year, the Non-Executive Directors 
visited the following sites:

FAI Farms — Oxford, UK

Benchmark Head Office  
— Sheffield, UK

Benchmark’s founding site, hosting  
the Sustainability Science division and  
a working research farm

Benchmark’s head office, hosting the 
finance team and publishing teams within 
the Technical Publishing division

Benchmark Animal Health 
— Edinburgh, Scotland, UK

Location of Benchmark Animal Health’s 
product development team 

INVE Aquaculture  
— Dendermonde, Belgium

INVE Aquaculture’s global headquarters 
and R&D team 

TomAlgae  
— Nevele, Belgium

TomAlgae’s algae production facilities 

•  Ensure the provision of information necessary for Directors 
to take a full and constructive part in Board discussions

Benchmark Vaccines  
— Braintree, UK

Benchmark Vaccine’s state-of-the-art 
vaccine manufacturing suite 

•  Develop and maintain effective communications  

with shareholders

•  Establish appropriate personal objectives for the Chief 

Executive Officer

•  Ensure the Directors are up to date and receive suitable 

training and development

The role of the Chief Executive Officer is to:

•  Oversee operation of the day-to-day business of the Group

•  Lead the development and delivery of strategy and  

budget, to enable the Group to meet the requirements  
of its shareholders

•  Lead and oversee the executive management of the Group

FAI Aquaculture  
— Ardtoe, Scotland, UK

FAI Aquaculture’s advanced marine 
research facility 

The Board also received a number of presentations from 
senior management throughout the year, including from the 
Heads of Division of each of the Animal Health, Advanced 
Animal Nutrition and Breeding and Genetics divisions, the 
Head of People and Group Health and Safety Manager. 

During the year, the Board received training on Directors’ 
responsibilities from Numis and updates on key regulatory 
developments, including new Market Abuse Regulations, 
Insurance Act 2015, gender pay gap reporting and PSC 
(persons exercising significant control) regime.

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Governance

69

Independence of Non-Executive Directors

The Board considered each Non-Executive Director’s 
independence on appointment, and concluded that they  
were independent. The Board reviews independence on an 
annual basis and has concluded that the Non-Executive 
Directors all remain independent. 

Non-Executive Directors are appointed for specified terms, 
subject to re-election by shareholders, and terms beyond 6 years 
are subject to rigorous review. Accordingly, Non-Executive 
Directors are appointed for a maximum of two terms of 3 
years, and thereafter may serve for an additional period 
only at the invitation of the Board following scrutiny of their 
continued independence. Alex Hambro and Susan Searle 
were appointed for a second 3-year term commencing 18 
December 2016, subject to re-election by shareholders. The 
respective periods of service of our Non-Executive Directors 
are set out below.

3 years,  
2 months

3 years,  
2 months

Name

Alex Hambro  
Chair

Date of appointment

Term

18 December 2013

Susan Searle 
Senior Independent Director

18 December 2013

Kevin Quinn 
Non-Executive Director

25 November 2016

2 months

Conflicts of interest

Directors are obliged to seek authorisation from the Board 
before taking up any position which conflicts, or which may 
conflict, with the interests of the Company. The Board is 
empowered to authorise situations of potential conflict,  
where it sees fit, in order that a Director is not in breach  
of his/her duties. 

The interested Director is excluded from voting on the 
resolution to authorise the conflict. The Directors may resolve 
that any such transaction or arrangement be subject to 
such terms as they may determine. All existing external 
appointments and other such situational conflicts of Directors 
have been considered and authorised by the Board. 

All Directors are required to ensure that their external 
appointments do not involve a time commitment that would 
adversely affect their responsibilities to the Company. 

If a Director is a party to or otherwise interested in any 
actual or proposed transaction or other arrangement with the 
Company, or in which the Company is otherwise interested, 
the Director is obliged to declare his/her interest in the 
transaction or arrangement. The Directors may resolve that 
any such transaction or arrangement be subject to such terms 
as they may determine. Where the interest is material, the 
interested Director will not be permitted to vote on decisions 
relating to the matters in which he/she has an interest.

Information and independent professional advice

The Company Secretary assists the Chairs of the Board and 
each of the Nomination Committee, Remuneration Committee 
and Audit Committee to ensure that the Directors have access 
to the information and advice they require to carry out their 
roles effectively.

The Directors have access to independent professional advice 
at the Company’s expense. In addition, they have access to 
the services of the Company Secretary, who is responsible for 
advising the Board on corporate governance matters.

ACCOUNTABILITY

Audit Committee Report

The composition of the Audit Committee up to 19 July 2016 was:

All Committee members are independent Non-executive Directors.

•  Basil Brookes (Chair)

•  Alex Hambro

On 29 July, Basil Brookes announced his retirement from 
the Audit Committee for health reasons. Susan Searle was 
temporarily appointed to the committee and Alex Hambro was 
temporarily appointed Chairman of the committee pending the 
recruitment of Basil’s successor. Subsequent to the year end 
on 25 November 2016, Kevin Quinn was appointed Chairman 
of the Audit Committee and Susan Searle stepped down 
from the committee. Kevin is serving Chief Financial Officer 
of a FTSE 250 plc and a qualified Chartered Accountant and 
hence is considered a financial expert. Further information on 
Kevin’s relevant experience is provided on page 63. We would 
like to thank Basil for his valuable contribution to the Audit 
Committee over the past 3 years.

In addition to the Committee members, there are a number of 
regular attendees at each meeting. The Chief Financial Officer 
(CFO) and lead external audit partner normally attend all 
scheduled Audit Committee meetings. The Audit Committee 
members regularly take time before or after a meeting, 
without any Executive Directors or senior management 
present, to raise any questions and discuss issues with the 
external auditor. The Chairman of the Audit Committee meets 
the CFO and the external auditor separately to review current 
issues and developments prior to each meeting of the Audit 
Committee, such meetings often taking place by telephone.

Key objective

To ensure that the interests of shareholders are properly 
protected in relation to financial reporting and internal controls.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Responsibilities

Presentation of results

During the year the main responsibilities were:

•  To review accounting policies and the integrity and content 

of the financial statements;

•  To monitor disclosure controls and procedures and the 

Group’s internal controls;

•  To consider the adequacy and scope of external audits;

•  To oversee a tendering exercise and appoint the new 

external auditor;

•  Considering and recommending that the Annual Report 

and Accounts 2015/16, when taken as a whole, are fair, 
balanced and understandable;

•  To monitor the objectivity, independence and effectiveness 
of the external auditor, including the scope and expenditure 
on non-audit work;

•  To review and approve the statements to be included in the 
Annual Report on internal control and risk management;

•  To review and report on the significant issues  

considered in relation to the financial statements  
and how they are addressed.

The Committee’s terms of reference are reviewed annually and 
a summary of these are available on the Governance section 
of our website at www.benchmarkplc.com.

Actions undertaken during the year

The key activities for the Committee for the period under 
review are set out below.

At the request of the Board, the Committee reviewed the 
presentation of the Group’s unaudited results for the six 
months ended 31 March 2016 and the audited results for 
the year ended 30 September 2016 to ensure they were 
fair, balanced and understandable and provide sufficient 
information necessary for shareholders and other users of  
the accounts to assess the Group’s position and performance, 
business model and strategy. Particular attention was 
paid to the presentation of the results and the separation 
of the statutory IFRS results into Trading Activities and 
Investing Activities. The board continues to regard this as 
an appropriate way to present the underlying performance 
and development of the business and this is how it monitors 
progress of the existing group businesses. Trading Activities 
are those related to products and services that have been 
developed and are producing revenue streams, while Investing 
Activities relate to the costs associated with acquiring new 
businesses and products and services being developed for 
future revenue streams and include a pipeline of vaccines  
at various stages of the development cycle.

Acquisition accounting

The Committee considered the acquisition accounting for the 
transformational acquisition of INVE Aquaculture which took 
place in December 2015. Particular attention was paid to the 
identification, measurement and assessment of the intangible 
assets arising on acquisition, with independent valuations 
being sought for those assets, and the assumptions behind 
those valuations being subjected to very close scrutiny with 
both the CFO and the external auditor.

External auditor

Management override of internal controls

In light of the rapid recent growth in the size and scale of 
the Benchmark Group, and with a view to implementing best 
corporate governance practice regarding auditor independence 
and the split of audit and non-audit work, the Board made the 
decision to put the position of external auditor out to tender. 
The Audit Committee led a full and formal tender process after 
which KPMG were appointed effective from 26 May 2016.

Following the appointment, in accordance with section 519  
of the Companies Act 2006, BDO deposited with the Company 
a statement confirming that there are no circumstances in 
connection with its resignation as auditor that should be drawn 
to the attention of the Company’s shareholders. 

A review of the annual audit plan and process has been 
undertaken with the lead audit partner. The robustness of 
the audit process and service levels provided was rigorously 
assessed during the tender process and following the first 
full year audit, with significant input sought from senior 
management and others involved in the audit process across 
the business. Following best practice in promoting auditor 
independence, separate tax advisers have been engaged 
during the year, and non audit fees payable to the external 
auditor (and the outgoing external auditor) were monitored 
throughout the year and their level were taken into account, 
amongst other criteria, when awarding non audit work.

The independence, objectivity and performance of the external 
auditor was assessed and the Committee recommended  
to the Board that their reappointment as the auditors of the 
Company be recommended to shareholders at the Annual 
General meeting of the Company to be held on 7 March 2017.

The Committee considered the inherent risk of management 
override of internal controls as defined by auditing standards. 
In doing so the Committee continue to review the overall 
robustness of the control environment, including consideration 
of the Group’s whistleblowing arrangements and the review by 
the external auditor.

Following the acquisition of INVE, integration of the  
business has progressed well and work is continuing to 
identify and implement best practice controls across the 
enlarged business. No major weaknesses have been  
identified in this process. 

Goodwill and intangible assets impairment review

The Committee considered the carrying value of the  
Group’s businesses, including goodwill and intangible assets. 
The Committee reviewed management’s recommendations, 
which were also reviewed by the external auditor, including an 
evaluation of the appropriateness of the assumptions applied 
in determining asset carrying values and the appropriateness 
of the identification of cash generating units. After review 
the Committee was satisfied with the assumptions and 
judgements applied by management and concluded that  
no impairment of carrying values was required.

Revenue recognition

The Committee considered the inherent risk of fraud in 
revenue recognition as defined by auditing standards and  
was satisfied that there were no issues arising.

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Governance

71

Going Concern

The Committee was presented by management with an 
assessment of the Group’s future cash forecasts and profit 
projections, available facilities, facility headroom, banking 
covenants and the results of a sensitivity analysis. The 
Committee discussed the assessment with management 
and was satisfied that the going concern basis of preparation 
continues to be appropriate for the Group and advised the 
Board accordingly. 

Risk management

Effective risk management and control is key to the  
delivery of the Group’s business strategy and objectives.  
Risk management and control processes are designed to 
identify, assess, mitigate and monitor significant risks, and 
can only provide reasonable and not absolute assurance that 
the Group will be successful in delivering its objectives. The 
Board is responsible for the oversight of how the Group’s 
strategic, operational, financial, human, legal and regulatory 
risks are managed and for assessing the effectiveness of  
the risk management and internal control framework.

Work has continued to ensure that risk management is 
embedded in the Group’s procedures and significant further 
work has been done to update the Risk Register and to 
re-affirm the effectiveness of risk management procedures 
following the INVE acquisition. 

A description of the Group’s risk management procedures  
and the work completed in the year is provided in the Principal 
Risks and Uncertainties section on pages 56 to 59.

Internal audit

Following the acquisition of INVE, the size, scale and complexity 
of the Group has increased. As noted above, significant work 
has been performed on the Risk Register and the Committee 
continues to monitor whether an internal audit function could 
be justified. During the year the decision was made not to 
set up such a function while work was ongoing to assess the 
risks of the enlarged Group. This matter will be reconsidered 
in the forthcoming year.

Safeguards and effectiveness  
of the external auditor

The Committee recognises the importance of safeguarding 
auditor objectivity. The following safeguards are in place to 
ensure that auditor independence is not compromised:

•  The Audit Committee carries out an annual review of the 
external auditor as to its independence from the Group  
in all material respects and that it is adequately resourced 
and technically capable to deliver an objective audit to 
shareholders. Based on this review the Audit Committee 
recommends to the Board the continuation, or removal  
and replacement, of the external auditor;

•  The decision was made in the year to split the role of tax 

advisor and external auditor;

•  The external auditor may provide audit-related services 
such as regulatory and statutory reporting as well as 
formalities relating to shareholder and other circulars;

•  The external auditor may undertake due diligence reviews 

and provide assistance on tax matters given its knowledge 
of the Group’s business. Such provision will be assessed 
on a case-by-case basis so that the best adviser is 
retained. The Audit Committee monitors the application  
of policy in this regard and keeps the policy under review;

•  The Audit Committee reviews on a regular basis all fees 
paid for audit and consultancy services with a view to 
assessing the reasonableness of fees, value of delivery 
and any independence issues that may have arisen or  
may potentially arise in the future;

•  The external auditor reports to the Directors and the Audit 

Committee regarding its independence in accordance with 
Auditing Standards. KPMG’s policy is that audit partners 
are required to be rotated every fifth year, and audit senior 
management require approval from the Engagement Partner 
and Engagement Quality Control Reviewer to continue 
after seven years, and approval from the UK Audit Risk 
Management Partner to continue after 10 years, but such 
approval will be rare and only likely for 1 or 2 years;

•  Different teams are used on all other assignments 

undertaken by the auditor;

•  Non-audit services carried out by the external auditor  

are generally limited to work that is closely related to the 
annual audit or where the work is of such a nature that  
a detailed understanding of the business is beneficial;

•  The Audit Committee monitors these costs in absolute 
terms and in the context of the audit fee for the year, 
in order to ensure that the potential to affect auditor 
independence and objectivity does not arise. The Committee 
does not adopt a formulaic approach to this assessment. 
The split between audit and non-audit fees for 2016 and 
information on the nature of the non-audit fees incurred  
is detailed in Note 6 accompanying the consolidated 
financial statements.

The Audit Committee monitors the effectiveness of the 
external audit functions. To comply with this requirement, 
the Committee reviews and comments on the external audit 
plans before it approves them. It then considers progress 
during the year by assessing the major findings of their work, 
the perceptiveness of observations, the implementation of 
recommendations and management feedback. At the request 
of the Board, the Committee also monitors the integrity of all 
financial statements in the Annual Report and half year results 
statements, and the significant financial reporting judgements 
contained in them. Further details of the Committee’s procedures 
to review the effectiveness of the Group’s systems of internal 
control during the year can be found in the section on effective 
risk management and internal control below. The Committee 
recognises that all financial statements include estimates and 
judgements by management. The key audit areas are agreed 
with management and the external auditors as part of the 
year-end audit planning process. This includes an assessment 
by management at both a business unit and Group level 
of the significant areas requiring management judgement. 
These areas are reviewed with the auditors to ensure that 
appropriate levels of audit work are completed and the results 
of this work are reviewed by the Committee.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Risk management and internal  
control system features

Risk management control system

As well as the risks that management identify through the 
ongoing processes of reporting and performance analysis,  
the Audit Committee has additional risk identification 
processes, which include:

•  Risk and control process for identifying, evaluating and 

managing major business risks. During the year, the CFO 
oversaw an exercise to evaluate the risks faced by the 
business following the acquisition of INVE and to identify 
suitable mitigating actions;

•  External audit reports, which comment on controls  
to manage identified risks and identify new ones;

•  A confidential whistle-blowing helpline and an email 
address available for employees to contact the  
Non-executive Directors in confidence.

Internal control system

The internal controls which provide assurance to the Committee 
of effective and efficient operations, internal financial controls 
and compliance with law and regulation include:

•  A formal authorisation process for investments;

•  An organisational structure where authorities and 

responsibilities for financial management and maintenance 
of financial controls are clearly defined;

•  Anti-bribery and corruption policies and procedures and  

a dedicated email hotline, designed to address the specific 
areas of risk of corruption faced by the Group; 

•  A comprehensive financial review cycle where the annual 

budget is approved by the Board and monthly variances are 
reviewed against detailed financial and operating plans.

Kevin Quinn 
Chairman of the Audit Committee 
24 January 2017

Effective risk management and internal control

One of the Board’s key responsibilities is to ensure that 
management maintains a system of internal control which 
provides assurance of effective and efficient operations, 
internal financial controls and compliance with law and 
regulation. The Group’s systems are designed to identify 
key financial and other risks to the Group’s business and 
reputation, and to ensure that appropriate controls are in 
place. Consideration is given to the relative costs and  
benefits of implementing specific controls.

Assurance

On behalf of the Board, the Audit Committee examines the 
effectiveness of:

•  The systems of internal control, primarily through reviews  
of the financial controls for financial reporting of the annual, 
preliminary and half yearly financial statements and a 
review of the nature, scope and reports of external audit;

•  The management of risk by reviewing evidence of risk 

assessment and management; and

•  Any action taken to manage critical risks or to remedy  
any control failings or weaknesses identified, ensuring 
these are managed through to closure.

The Audit Committee has completed its review of the 
effectiveness of the Group’s systems of internal control  
during the year. It confirms that the necessary action plans  
to remedy identified weaknesses in internal control are in 
place and have been throughout the year. Where appropriate, 
the Audit Committee ensures that necessary actions have 
been, or are being, taken to remedy or mitigate significant 
failings or weaknesses identified from the review of 
effectiveness of internal controls. The Group’s internal 
controls over the financial reporting and consolidation 
processes are designed under the supervision of the CFO 
to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of 
financial reporting and the preparation and fair presentation 
of the Group’s published financial statements for external 
reporting purposes in accordance with IFRS.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over 
financial reporting cannot provide absolute assurance and 
may not prevent or detect all misstatements whether caused 
by error or fraud. The Group’s internal controls over financial 
reporting and the preparation of consolidated financial 
information include policies and procedures that provide 
reasonable assurance that transactions have been recorded 
and presented accurately.

Management regularly conducts reviews of the internal controls 
in place in respect of the processes of preparing consolidated 
financial information and financial reporting. During the year 
ended 30 September 2016, there were no changes to the 
internal controls over these processes that have or are 
reasonably likely to materially affect the level of assurance 
provided over the reliability of the financial statements.

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Governance

73

REMUNERATION

Remuneration Report for year  
ended 30 September 2016

Statement from Susan Searle, Chairman  
of the Remuneration Committee

This year has marked a major transformation for the business 
with the early months focused on the acquisition of INVE and 
its subsequent integration into the wider Benchmark Group. 
The INVE transaction itself was an extraordinary deal to 
deliver and to achieve that alongside a major equity and debt 
raise was testament to the management team’s sheer hard 
work and conviction in building out and largely completing the 
Company’s aquaculture platform. The focus through the year 
has been on merging the teams, drawing out the synergies 
through integration and innovation and all whilst continuing  
to deliver results despite some major headwinds. The end 
of the year saw the purchase of shrimp breeding programme 
from Ceniacua, another astute deal complementing both the 
original business but also bringing with it the opportunity to 
leverage the commanding sales presence INVE has in shrimp 
farm hatcheries. 

The team has assembled some high quality IP assets and 
a platform that will deliver long-term shareholder value. The 
investment in infrastructure is ongoing with major capital 
projects, such as the vaccine production plant at Braintree 
and SalmoBreed Salten requiring considerable management 
oversight in building the footprint for a substantial business. 
Not all has gone to plan, the share price suffered during the 
year but has recovered and a modest equity raise primarily  
to finance SalmoBreed Salten was done at a difficult time.  
The Salten investment will attract and cement partnerships 
with several large customers and is part of the strategy for 
scaling the future revenue streams. The executive team made 
some difficult decisions that should result in greater value  
for shareholders in the long run. 

I have reported in the past that the Executive Directors have 
been compensated considerably behind prevailing market 
rates, particularly in terms of base salary. In 2016 the Group 
ended the year with 884 people, £109.4m turnover and 
market cap at 31 December 2016 of £433m. This is a long 
way from the 200 people, £25m turnover and market cap of 
£212m in 2015. The board believes it has an exceptionally 
talented executive team who continue to build an outstanding 
business and are motivated to build long-term value. A major 
component of future success will be to continue to build 
the human talent pool and to do that the Group must pay 
competitive salaries. MM&K were charged with reviewing the 
Executive Directors’ salary package and a decision has been 
taken to move base salaries to the lower quartile of AIM/main 
list companies where the midpoint is in a comparable turnover 
range. This is a significant change to the executive team’s 
base salaries and a material corrective step. The objective 
over the next 2–3 years is to further move the team to median 
salaries for the relevant range as the expected synergies 
are demonstrated, the business scales and the aquaculture 
platform is validated.

In reviewing the bonus provisions for Executive Directors,  
the Remuneration Committee noted the team had delivered 
in line with the Board’s expectations on the numbers and 
delivered in all four areas set out in the remuneration policy 

on page 75 of this report. This had to be balanced against the 
fact that this progress was not reflected in the share price and 
that the decision to do a modest equity raise in August was 
not well received by some of our shareholders. Alex Hambro 
and I visited many of our significant shareholders during the 
summer and took their feedback into consideration when 
trying to strike the right balance.

The Remuneration Committee believes it has been a 
momentous year for both the Company and the executive 
team who have displayed entrepreneurial and determined 
leadership throughout the year and should be congratulated 
for delivering an impressive business with considerable scope 
for growth with the assets they have assembled.

Susan Searle 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee 
24 January 2017

Remuneration Committee overview

The composition of the Remuneration Committee  
during the year was:

•  Susan Searle (Chair)

•  Basil Brookes

•  Alex Hambro 

The Committee comprises two independent Non-Executive 
Directors with the Company Secretary acting as secretary 
and the Head of People attending committee meetings to 
provide advice on policies and practices. At appropriate times, 
the Committee invites the views of the Chief Executive and 
Chairman of the Board, and seeks advice from independent 
remuneration consultants. No Director or employee is present 
when his or her own remuneration or fees are discussed.

Key objectives: The key objectives of the Remuneration 
Committee are to develop the Company’s policy on executive 
remuneration and to fix the remuneration of the Executive 
Directors, Chairman of the Board and Senior Managers.

Responsibilities: The main responsibilities of the  
Committee are:

•  To monitor and develop the Company’s remuneration policy

•  To determine the remuneration of the Executive Directors

•  To approve the service agreements of the Executive Directors

•  To approve the remuneration of Senior Managers 

•  To determine the fees of the Chairman 

•  To review the Company’s annual bonus proposals  

and to approve bonuses for the Executive Directors  
and Senior Managers

•  To approve the design of and oversee all awards  

under the Company’s share incentive plans

•  To consider risks to the Group in light of its  

remuneration policies

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

An overview of the Remuneration Committee’s terms of 
reference is available on the Governance section of our 
website at www.benchmarkplc.com.

Actions undertaken during the year: With the acquisition of 
INVE in December 2015 and the purchase of shrimp breeding 
programme from Ceniacua in August 2016, the number of 
employees moved from 402 to 884 (120% increase in 
headcount) and the number of countries where the Group  
has offices increased from 14 to 27, overlapping with INVE in  
3 countries. With this in mind the Remuneration Committee 
has instigated a review of terms and conditions across the 
Group. In addition, talent management and succession 
planning has become a priority. Benchmark operates within  
a highly technical industry and wants to ensure that it has the 
very best people to drive forward innovation across the divisions 
of Breeding and Genetics, Advanced Animal Nutrition and Animal 
Health. The responsibilities of the committee were also 
reviewed during the year.

Directors’ Remuneration Policy

The Group’s policy is unchanged and seeks to balance three 
key objectives:

•  To pay reasonably competitively in the relevant talent 

markets to sustain motivation and commitment, recognising 
that Benchmark has a unique culture and staff join and 
remain with Benchmark in order to share in the Company’s 
vision for sustainability and participate in the important 
work it does 

•  To remunerate in a way that makes economic sense for  
the Company, ensuring there is a fair balance of return to 
the executive team, management, staff and shareholders 
for their contributions to the Company’s success

•  To encourage the cooperative behaviours which promote 

business priorities and lead to high performance 

The Company’s remuneration policy supports a climate of 
team involvement and generates a shared enthusiasm for the 
growth and success of the Group as a whole. It encourages 
cooperation, sharing of ideas and mutual support between 
people in different business units. The policy reflects and 
supports the sense that the Group is involved in creating and 
delivering services which benefit mankind and the natural 
environment. It also recognises that the non-monetary rewards 
of team membership, intellectual stimulation, freedom, creativity 
and producing something worthwhile, have equal or higher 
place in maintaining personal commitment and in attracting  
and retaining the best people. 

Remuneration policy

The Executive Directors’ remuneration comprises fixed 
elements in the form of a base salary, benefits and pension 
contributions, and a variable discretionary element in the form 
of a bonus, which may be satisfied in cash, deferred shares 
(or nominal cost share options) or a combination of both.  
The Company has long-term share plans in place but does not 
intend to make awards to the Executive Directors this year.

Fixed elements of remuneration 

The fixed elements of the Executive Directors’ remuneration 
are designed to attract and retain Directors of the appropriate 
calibre, with the requisite knowledge, skills and experience, 
and to sustain motivation and commitment. 

Following a further review by MM&K the Remuneration 
Committee has concluded that the appropriate benchmark  
for the Executive Directors’ salaries is lower quartile for  
AIM/main listed companies falling in the turnover range 
£101–300m and has also reviewed comparators in the 
market cap range. The Executive Directors’ salaries from IPO 
have been substantially below those of their peer group. The 
Remuneration Committee concluded that this is no longer 
tenable or appropriate, particularly as the Group seeks to 
attract in further high calibre talent and pays competitive 
compensation. The Directors are running a very different 
company in size and scale from that which listed in 2014. 
Accordingly this year the Executive Directors base salaries 
have been significantly adjusted. Over the next 2–3 years the 
Company expects to be at median for the comparator range 
once the combined business demonstrates clearly on its 
plans and this is reflected in valuation.

The Executive Directors all participate in defined contribution 
pension schemes on terms consistent with those of other 
employees. The Company contributes up to 10% of the 
employee’s salary, starting at 5% and increasing by 1% for 
every 3 years of service. The Executive Directors also receive 
private medical insurance for themselves and their families 
and death in service benefits.

Variable elements of remuneration

Executive Directors are eligible for an annual performance 
bonus, part of which may be deferred for three years and paid 
in shares or nominal cost share options. The maximum award, 
including any deferred element, is 100% of salary. The bonus 
is designed to reward and incentivise success leading to 
sustainable long-term growth and to recognise the Directors’ 
commitment to the business. Performance is measured by 
reference to four key metrics, set out below.

•  Progress towards the Group’s objectives of mid to long-term 

growth in revenue and trading earnings per share

•  Successful and secure investment of the Group’s available 
capital in long-term revenue and generation of EBITDA from 
trading activities

•  Building on the Group’s track record of recruiting the 

highest calibre and most appropriate people, in terms  
of skills and experience

•  Establishing a strong and long-lasting leadership  

position in the development of sustainable food and 
farming internationally

The Remuneration Committee exercises judgment in 
assessing performance against these metrics when setting 
bonus levels for the Executive Directors. The remuneration 
of senior management is also taken into consideration. 
The bonus is discretionary and no element of the bonus 
is guaranteed. Long-term incentive plans may be used to 
supplement the variable elements of the total reward.

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Governance

75

Non-executive Directors’ terms of appointment

Executive Directors

Statement of consideration of employment 
conditions elsewhere in the Group

Historically, the salaries across the Group have been 
increased annually by reference to the retail price index. In 
2016, the average salary increase across the Group including 
senior management was 4%. This percentage rise included 
adjustments made for additional responsibilities taken on  
by staff as the Group’s activities expanded. The entitlements 
of the Executive Directors to pension contributions are  
the same as those of employees. Bonuses for employees  
are determined on a discretionary basis, by reference to  
a combination of Group and individual performance. Senior 
Managers’ bonuses for 2016 will be paid part in cash, and  
part will be deferred and satisfied in nominal cost share 
options (other than where the individual is already  
a substantial shareholder in the Company).

The Company expects and encourages everyone in the  
team to have an interest in the Company’s shares in order  
to foster a culture of cooperation and shared participation 
in the Group’s achievements and the remuneration policy 
supports this by issuing share options to employees at  
a level that reflects the strategic contribution of their role. 
Following the successful acquisition of INVE the Company 
issued 3,093,493 nominal cost share options (0.65% of 
issued share capital) to 419 employees that were new to 
the Group and 31 senior managers, excluding the Executive 
Directors. The grant is in line with the Company’s historic 
remuneration policy, which has seen options granted across 
the workforce at times of significant achievement in the 
Company’s development. 

Executive Directors’ service contracts  
and remuneration on termination

Each Executive Director contract commenced on 18 December 
2013 and is terminable by either party on 12 months’ notice 
at any time, and by the Company at any time and without 
compensation in case of serious misconduct, breach of duty 
or in similar circumstances. 

In the event of termination by the Company without cause, 
the Executive Director is entitled to receive payment of salary 
for any unexpired notice period and any accrued holiday 
entitlement. In the event of termination for cause, the Director 
is not entitled to compensation in respect of salary.

The Executive Directors’ bonuses are fully discretionary.  
In the event of termination during a bonus period, the Committee 
will consider payment of a bonus on a pro rata basis for the 
relevant portion of the year worked, having regard to the 
circumstances. Deferred bonuses which have been satisfied 
in share options remain exercisable where the Executive 
Director is a good leaver, including in case of death, incapacity, 
redundancy, retirement, and where the Remuneration 
Committee so determines. In all other circumstances, 
deferred bonuses satisfied in share options cease to be 
exercisable on termination of employment and lapse.

The Non-Executive Directors hold office under letters of 
appointment. Each appointment is for a term of 3 years 
commencing on 18 December 2013 but with an additional 
period of 3 years anticipated. All directors are required to 
stand for re-election at least every three years. In accordance 
with best practice, all directors stood for re-election at the 
Annual General Meeting held on 10 March 2016 and all were 
elected for a further 3 years. 

Regrettably, Basil Brookes was forced by ill-health to  
step down as a Non-Executive Director in July 2016 and  
on 25 November 2016 Kevin Quinn was appointed as  
a new Non-Executive Director. Kevin replaced Basil on the 
Remuneration Committee.

Either the Company or the Non-Executive Director may 
terminate the appointment on 3 months’ notice, and the 
appointments are subject to the Company’s articles 
of association and to the Director being re-elected by 
shareholders upon retirement by rotation. On termination as 
a result of the Non-Executive Director not being re-elected by 
shareholders or under the articles of association for reasons 
connected with outside interests or independence, the 
appointment terminates immediately and the Non-Executive 
Director is not entitled to compensation. On termination in 
other circumstances, including on 3 months’ notice, a Non-
Executive Director is entitled to accrued but unpaid directors’ 
fees to the date of termination but no other compensation.

The dates of appointment of and length of service for each 
Non-Executive Director are shown in the table below.

Name

Date of appointment

Basil Brookes

18 December 2013

Alex Hambro

18 December 2013

Susan Searle

18 December 2013

Kevin Quinn

25 November 2016

Length of service 
as at 2017 AGM

Stood down on 
29 July 2016

3 years,  
2 months

3 years,  
2 months

3 months

Shareholder dilution

The total number of ordinary shares issued and issuable  
in respect of options granted in any ten year period under the 
Company’s discretionary share option schemes (excluding 
pre-IPO options under the Enterprise Management Incentive 
(EMI) scheme) is restricted to 10% of the Company’s issued 
ordinary shares from time to time. 

In the financial year ended 30 September 2016 the Company 
allocated 3,093,493 nominal cost share options (0.65% of 
issued share capital) to staff including senior management  
as mentioned on page 76. 

Annual Report on Remuneration for 2016

Single total figure of remuneration for the financial year  
ended 30 September 2016.

The remuneration in respect of qualifying services of the 
Directors who served during the financial year ended 30 
September 2016 is as set out below.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Total

2015

206,950

200,670

215,552

Salary 

Bonus (a)

Taxable benefits 
(b)

Long-term 
incentive

Roland Bonney

Mark Plampin

Malcolm Pye

171,250

162,500

187,500

99,000

93,000

110,000

2,379

2,374

3,246

-

-

-

Pension

16,313

10,883

17,375

2016

288,942

268,707

318,121

(a)  The balance of the cash bonuses were paid in January 2017. Mark Plampin has elected to defer 60% of his bonus to be satisfied in nominal cost options.

(b)  Benefits provided for all Executive Directors are medical insurance coverage for the Directors and their families, and death in service benefits.  

Also includes taxable mileage payments as a result of the Company’s policy of paying 55p per business mile (10p per mile paid over the HMRC  
rate of 45p per mile is taxable via P11Ds).

Executive Directors’ salaries were reviewed with effect from 1 January 2017. Following a benchmarking exercise undertaken  
by the Remuneration Committee and having regard to the Group’s performance in 2016, the increases awarded are shown  
on page 78.

Non-Executive Directors

Basil Brookes

Alex Hambro

Susan Searle

2016

35,000(a)(b)

45,000

42,500(b)

Fees

2015

35,000

45,000

35,000

(a) For period 1 October 2015 to 29 July 2016.

(b) The fees for Susan Searle and Basil Brookes were reviewed with effect from 1st January 2016 and increased to £45,000 per year.

Executive Directors’ bonuses for the financial year ended 30 September 2016

As described in the Chairman’s statement, the Remuneration Committee considered the performance of the Executive Directors 
against the delivery of long-term sustainable growth and their performance against four KPIs set out on page 75. 

Accordingly, the Executive Directors received bonuses in respect of the financial year ended 30 September 2016 as set out below.

Roland Bonney

Mark Plampin 

Malcolm Pye 

2016

99,000

93,000(a)

110,000

Bonus (£)

2015

55,000

55,000

55,000

(a) Mark Plampin has elected to defer 60% of the 2016 bonus to be satisfied as nominal cost options.

Defined contribution pension scheme

The Executive Directors all participate in defined contribution pension schemes. Roland Bonney and Malcolm Pye participate in 
the Benchmark Holdings Executive Pension Scheme and Mark Plampin participates in a self-invested personal pension (SIPP).

In accordance with the policy set out on page 75, the Company contributes 10% of salary for each of Roland Bonney and  
Malcolm Pye, and 7% of salary for Mark Plampin.

LTIP awards

No awards under the Company’s share plans were made to Executive Directors in the financial year ended 30 September 2016. 

Executive Directors’ external appointments 

None of the Executive Directors held non-executive directorships or external appointments with organisations other than the 
Company in the financial year ended 30 September 2016. 

Non-Executive Directors’ fees for the financial year ended 30 September 2016 

No changes were made to the Non-Executive Directors’ fees in the financial year ended 30 September 2016. Kevin Quinn was 
appointed as a new Non-Executive Director on 25 November 2016.

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Governance

77

Statement of implementation of Remuneration Policy in 2017

Executive directors’ salaries

In the light of the substantial growth of the Company, a review of base salaries and the fact that the Executive Directors’ salaries 
have been substantially below market over the last few years, the Remuneration Committee has taken a corrective step in 2017 
and as described in the Chairman’s statement will look to move the base salaries towards the median range over the next 2–3 
years. Accordingly, from 1 January 2017, the Executive Directors’ base pay was increased as set out below.

Roland Bonney

Mark Plampin 

Malcolm Pye 

Bonus

Salary (£)

Increase in salary 2016 to 2017 (%)

2017

265,000

250,000

310,000

2016

180,000

170,000

200,000

47%

47%

55%

The 2017 bonus will be implemented in line with the future policy described above.

LTIP

The Company does not intend to make awards to the Executive Directors under its long-term share incentive plans in 2017. 

Additional information on Directors’ interests

Directors’ interests under the Company’s employee share plans

Details of the Executive Directors’ interests in outstanding share awards under the employee share plans during the financial 
year ended 30 September 2016 are set out below.

Options 
held at 30 
September 
2015

Share option 
scheme

Options 
exercised in 
year

Options 
granted in 
year

At 30 September 
2016

Exercise price

Grant date

Date from which 
exercisable

Mark Plampin

EMI scheme

135,000 (a)

Mark Plampin

CSOP II

67,647

-

-

-

-

135,000

67,647

0.1p

29 August 2013

29 August 2016

0.1p

9 March 2015

8 March 2018

(a)  Prior to its IPO, the Company operated an Enterprise Management Incentive (EMI) share option scheme. At 30 September 2016, options over 1,202,000 
ordinary shares remained outstanding under the EMI scheme, including options over 135,000 ordinary shares held by Mark Plampin as detailed above. 
No further grants may be made under the EMI scheme.

Directors’ interests in ordinary shares 

At 30 September 2016, the interests of the Directors and their connected persons in ordinary shares was as follows. 

Roland Bonney

Basil Brookes 

Alex Hambro 

Malcolm Pye

Mark Plampin

Susan Searle 

Interests in ordinary shares  
at 30 September 2016

% of Company’s  
issued share capital (d)

Interests in ordinary shares  
at 30 September 2015 

15,145,686

49,062 (b)

46,875 (b)

15,145,686

401,686 (c)

98,125 (b)

2.91%

0.01%

0.01%

2.91%

0.08%

0.02%

15,145,686

39,062 (b)

46,875 (b)

15,145,686

401,686 (c)

98,125 (b)

(b) Held through self-invested personal pension (SIPP).

(c)  Comprising 130,000 ordinary shares registered in own name, 267,000 ordinary shares held through self-invested personal pension (SIPP) and 4,686 

ordinary shares held through the Benchmark employee share incentive plan. 

(d) As at 30 September 2016.

Mark Plampin exercised his 135,000 EMI options following the year end. The total number of ordinary shares held by him at the 
date of this report is 536,686. There were no further changes in Directors’ shareholdings between the 30th September 2016 
and the date of this report. 

Susan Searle
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee 
24 January 2017

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

SHAREHOLDERS

Share capital and substantial shareholdings

Details of the Company’s issued share capital, together with 
details of movements during the year, are shown in note 24 
accompanying the financial statements. The Company has one 
class of ordinary share which carries no right to fixed income. 
Each ordinary share carries the right to one vote at general 
meetings of the Company. 

As at 23 January 2017 the Company has been notified of 
the following substantial shareholdings under Rule 5 of the 
UKLA’s Disclosure and Transparency Rules:

% of issued share capital 

Woodford Investment Management Limited

Invesco Limited

Lansdowne Partners International Limited
Lansdowne Partners Limited
Lansdowne Partners (UK) LLP
FERD AS

The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc

25.10

16.17

15.34

10.79

6.84

Engagement with shareholders

Engagement with shareholders is essential to ensure  
that Benchmark’s strategy is understood and to receive 
feedback on this strategy, its implementation, performance 
and governance. It is crucial that shareholders have 
confidence in the Board’s ability to oversee development  
and implementation of strategy. 

DIRECTORS’ REPORT

The Directors present their Annual Report and audited 
financial statements of the Company and of the Group for  
the year ended 30 September 2016. 

Benchmark Holdings plc is a public limited company, 
incorporated and domiciled in England and Wales. Its shares 
are admitted to trading on AIM, London Stock Exchange’s 
international market for smaller growing companies.

The disclosure requirements of the Companies Act 2006, 
and where the Directors have deemed it appropriate, the UK 
Disclosure and Transparency Rules, have been met by the 
contents of this Directors’ Report, along with the Strategic 
Report, Corporate Governance Report, Nomination Committee 
Report, Audit Report and Remuneration Report, which should 
be read in conjunction with this report. 

UK Corporate Governance Code

The Company complies with the principles of the Code.  
A copy of the Code is available from the website of the 
Financial Reporting Council (www.frc.org.uk). An overview  
of the Company’s compliance with the principles of the Code 
is set out in the Directors’ Report on pages 79 to 83 of this 
report. Benchmark complies with the main principles of the 
Code, as set out in the diagram page 80.

If shareholders have concerns, they need to know to whom 
these should be addressed. The Chairman is primarily 
responsible for ensuring that the Board is accessible to major 
shareholders and that channels for communication are open. 
The Chairman is also responsible for ensuring that all of the 
Board members are aware of any feedback received from, or 
concerns raised by, major shareholders, and that these views 
are taken into account. The Senior Independent Director is 
available to shareholders if they have concerns which contact 
through the normal channels of Chairman, CEO or other 
Executive Directors has failed to resolve or for which such 
contact is inappropriate.

All members of the Board, including in particular the 
Chairman, Senior Independent Director, Chief Executive  
Officer and Chief Financial Officer, have regular dialogue  
with institutional shareholders. 

During the year:

•  A number of face-to-face meetings were held with institutional 
shareholders, including following release of the Annual 
Report and Accounts for 2015 and interim financial 
statements, and in connection with the July equity placing 

•  Directors attended the AGM, where they were available to 
answer questions and meet informally with shareholders

•  A number of meetings were held between institutional 
shareholders and the Chairman or other Non-Executive 
Directors

During the year, the Company did not comply with the following 
aspects of the Code: 

•  The Board did not conduct a formal evaluation of its 

performance in 2016, as a thorough and formal evaluation 
of the Board’s performance had been conducted towards  
the end of 2015, led by the Nomination Committee.  
During 2016, the Board evaluated its composition and the 
balance and breadth of skills, experience and independence 
on the Board, taking into account recent acquisitions and 
the global growth of the Group. The Company intends to 
undertake a further evaluation of its performance in 2017 

•  The Nomination Committee evaluates the performance  
of the Board as a whole and in doing so evaluates the 
performance of each of the Directors, but a formal evaluation 
of the performance of individual Directors is not undertaken. 
The Company intends to undertake evaluation of individual 
Directors as part of the Board’s performance review in 2017

•  The Company is not subject to the Listing Rules and is  
not required to make a longer term viability statement

•  The Audit Committee and Remuneration Committee each 
comprise two independent Non-Executive Directors (the 
Code recommends that three independent Directors should 
sit on each of these committees). The Company considers 
two independent Directors to be appropriate for the size  
of the Group and its Board 

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Governance

79

•  The bonus element of the Executive Directors’ remuneration 
is performance related. However, the Company believes 
that purely financial targets can lead to focus on delivery 
of short-term goals at the expense of long-term success 
and other opportunities, and therefore the key performance 
indicators used to determine performance based 

remuneration involve an element of discretion, which is 
exercised critically by the Remuneration Committee. Share 
options may be granted as part of a deferred bonus, in lieu 
of part of a cash bonus, and are accordingly offered at a 
discount (See pages 74 to 78).

Overview of compliance with principles of UK Corporate Governance Code

A.   Leadership

A.1 Role of Board

A.2  Clear division of 
responsibilities 

A.3 Role of Chairman 

The Board takes collective responsibility for the long-term success of the Group, and oversees the development 
and delivery of strategy and conduct of the business. It does this by exercising oversight and control over the 
performance of the Company through review of management financial information, agreeing budgetary targets,  
and approving investment programmes and monitoring their execution against budget and returns on investment. 
(See page 65)

There is a clear division of responsibilities between Chairman and Chief Executive Officer which is described on 
page 69 of this report.

The Chairman leads the Board, setting and managing the agenda, and promoting open and constructive discussion 
and challenge. (See page 69)

A.4  Role of Non-Executive 

Directors

The Board has a culture of transparency and open debate, and the Non-Executive Directors constructively challenge 
the Executive Directors regarding the strategy and its implementation. (See page 65)

B.   Effectiveness

B.1 Composition of the Board

B.2 Board appointments 

The Board and the Nomination Committee assessed the composition of the Board during the year and are of the 
view that it contains an appropriate breadth and balance of skills, knowledge, experience and independence.

The Nomination Committee leads the process for the appointment of new Directors, and follow a formal and 
rigorous process, with the assistance of independent external recruiters, and taking into account the Group’s 
policies regarding diversity. 

B.3 Time commitments 

Non-Executive Directors are notified of and agree to the required time commitments prior to appointment, and 
external directorships which may impact existing time commitments must be agreed with the Chairman. 

B.4 Training and development 

New Directors receive a comprehensive and formal induction programme which is tailored to their role and needs, 
and the Board receives updates regarding the business and regulatory developments. (See pages 66 to 67 and 69)

B.5  Provision of information  

and support 

The Chairman, supported by the Company Secretary, ensures that Board members receive accurate and timely 
information and other support requested, including access to external legal advice. 

B.6  Board and Committee 

performance evaluations

As, the Board conducted a formal evaluation of its own performance, size and composition in 2015, a formal 
evaluation of Board performance was not conducted in 2016. The Board intends to conduct a further review of  
its performance, and that of its committees, in 2017. 

B.7 Re-election of Directors 

The Articles of Association require Directors to retire by rotation at the third Annual General Meeting after the 
Annual General Meeting at which they were elected.

C.   Accountability

C.1  Financial and business 

reporting

The Audit Committee has reviewed the results for the year to 30 September 2016 to ensure they were fair, 
balanced and understandable. (See page 71)

C.2  Risk management and 

internal control systems 

The Board is responsible for ensuring that the Company has in place effective procedures for the management of 
risk, and that the principal risks faced by the Group are identified, assessed, appropriately mitigated and monitored. 
Pages 56 to 59 of this report sets out the Company’s risk framework and risk management activity. 

C.3  Role and responsibilities  
of the Audit Committee

Responsibility for oversight of the Group’s financial reporting procedures, internal controls and audit process is 
delegated to the Audit Committee, which also oversees the Group’s risk management framework.  
(See pages 70 to 71)

D.   Remuneration

D.1  Executive Directors’ 

remuneration

The policy for determining the remuneration of Executive Directors is set out in the Remuneration Report on  
pages 74 to 78. No Director is involved in setting his/her own remuneration.

D.2 Remuneration policy 

The Company’s remuneration policy is set out in the Remuneration Report on pages 74 to 78. 

E.   Relations with Shareholders

E.1 Shareholder engagement 

The Board engages actively and regularly with its shareholders. The Chairman and Senior Independent Director are 
available for discussions with major shareholders, and the Board is kept appraised of their views and feedback. 

E.2 Use of general meetings

The Directors are always available at the AGM to meet with shareholders, who are invited to raise questions and 
also to meet with the Board following the formal business of the meeting. 

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Annual General Meeting

Length of notice of general meetings

The next Annual General Meeting will be held at 10.00am  
on 7 March 2017 at the offices of Travers Smith LLP at 10 
Snow Hill, London, EC1A 2AL. Details of the AGM are set out 
in the Notice of AGM which is being posted to shareholders 
with this report. 

The Directors will be available at the AGM to answer questions 
and to meet with shareholders following conclusion of the 
formal business of the meeting. 

Re-election of Directors 

The re-appointment of Alex Hambro and Mark Plampin  
was approved at the Annual General Meeting held on  
10 March 2016. 

The Articles of Association require Directors to retire by rotation 
at the third Annual General Meeting after the Annual General 
Meeting at which they were elected. The Articles also provide 
that the Board has the power to appoint any person to be a 
Director, and that any Director appointed by the Board shall 
only hold office until the next following AGM. Kevin Quinn was 
appointed as a Director by the Board on 25 November 2016.

At the Annual General Meeting to be held on 7 March 2017, 
the following Directors are standing for re-election: Kevin 
Quinn, Susan Searle and Malcolm Pye.

Power to allot shares

Each year at the Annual General Meeting, the Directors 
seek authority to allot shares for the following year. At the 
last AGM held on 10 March 2016, shareholders authorised 
the Directors to allot relevant securities up to an aggregate 
nominal value of £157,969, representing one third of the 
issued share capital, and to further allot equity securities 
up to an additional aggregate nominal value of £157,969 in 
connection with a fully pre-emptive rights issue, in accordance 
with ABI guidance. Directors were authorised to allot for cash 
equity securities having a nominal value not exceeding in 
aggregate £47,390 (being 10% of issued share capital).  
The authorities expire at the conclusion of the next AGM. 

At the forthcoming AGM, authorities will be sought from 
shareholders similar to those sought at the 2016 AGM. 

Authority for the Company to purchase  
its own shares

At the Company’s 2016 Annual General Meeting, shareholders 
renewed the Company’s authorities to make market purchases 
of up to 47,390,733 ordinary shares, representing 10% of the 
Company’s issued share capital. These authorities were not 
used during the year, or up to the date of this report. At the 
2017 Annual General Meeting, shareholders will be asked to 
renew these authorities for another year, and the resolution 
will once again propose a maximum aggregate number of 
ordinary shares which the Company can purchase equal to 
10% of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital. Details 
are set out in the Notice of Annual General Meeting. 

The Company held no treasury shares during the year, or at 
the date of this report. 

The Companies Act 2006 requires listed companies to  
call general meetings on at least 21 clear days’ notice  
unless shareholders have approved the calling of meetings  
on shorter notice. At the 2015 AGM, a resolution approving 
14 days as the minimum period of notice for all general 
meetings of the Company other than AGMs was passed. 

The 14 day notice period will only be used where the flexibility 
is merited by the business of the meeting, and is thought 
to be in the best interests of shareholders as a whole. 
The Company offers the facility for shareholders to vote by 
electronic means. This facility is open to all shareholders and 
would be available if the Company were to call a meeting on 
14 clear days’ notice. 

Employee involvement 

Benchmark recognises that as the Group grows, additional 
systems are required to communicate information and 
strategy to all its people in an effective and timely way. The 
Group operates the following practices to ensure that all 
employees receive the information they require to optimise 
their personal performance and that of the Group, and to 
ensure effective functioning of internal control systems:

•  Members of the Operations Board and of the Divisional 

Boards are responsible for the communication of strategy 
and relevant developments to their managers and teams, 
and formal and informal meetings are held at local level  
to ensure effective dissemination of such information

•  Monthly newsletters are received by all employees, and 
include an update from the Executive Directors, together 
with information on business developments within the 
Group, new projects, investment programmes, and news 
regarding the aquaculture and animal health industries

•  One-off newsletters are used to promptly communicate 

important events, such as the release of results 
acquisitions, significant business developments, and  
other events which are announced to shareholders 

•  The Group’s intranet provides comprehensive information 
on each of the businesses within the Group, together 
with the Employee Handbook, policies, toolkits and other 
relevant information 

•  A programme of compliance training ensures that targeted 
training is provided to the workforce in relation to the 
Share Dealing Code, control of inside information, Matters 
Reserved for the Board, Anti-Bribery Policy, Whistleblowing 
Policy, employee share schemes and other matters 

•  One of the People Team’s responsibilities is to act  

as a bridge between the business and its employees, 
ensuring effective communication and where appropriate 
acting as mediator 

The Group has a policy of encouraging share ownership and 
over 72% of the Group’s employees hold shares or options in 
the Company. 

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Governance

81

Equal opportunity employer

Disclosure of information to auditors

Information elsewhere in the report 

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

At the date of approval of this Directors’ Report, each Director 
in office confirms that:

•  He/she knows of no information, which would be relevant 
to the auditors for the purposes of their audit report, of 
which the auditors are not aware 

•  He/she has taken all steps that he/she ought to have 
taken in order to make himself/herself aware of any  
such information and to establish that the auditors are 
aware of it

This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in 
accordance with the provisions of s418 Companies Act 2006.

Going concern

The Strategic Report reviews, in relation to the business  
as a whole:

•  Business activities

•  Financial position

•  Factors likely to affect future development and performance

•  Objectives and policies in managing the financial risks  

to which the business is exposed 

The Directors have assessed, in light of current and 
anticipated economic conditions, the Group’s ability to 
continue as a going concern, including its solvency and 
liquidity. The Directors confirm that they are satisfied that  
the Group and the Company have adequate resources to 
continue in business for the foreseeable future. For this 
reason, they continue to adopt the ‘going concern’ basis  
for preparing accounts.

The Group aims to be an equal opportunities employer and  
is committed to helping people to develop their potential. The 
Group is committed to giving disabled people and members 
of minority groups full and fair consideration for all vacancies 
for which they are suitably qualified. If any employees become 
disabled during employment, they will be retained wherever 
possible and retrained where appropriate. 

Directors’ indemnities 

All of the Directors benefited from qualifying third party 
indemnity provisions during the year and at the date of this report. 
The Company maintains appropriate D&O insurance cover in 
respect of legal action which may be taken against its Directors.

Political and charitable donations

No political donations were made by any Group companies  
in the year. 

The Company encourages employee involvement with charitable 
causes. Benchmark provides manpower and farm and office 
facilities to FarmAbility, a charity which works with adults with 
autism and learning difficulties by providing them with farming 
experience. Together, the Group’s employees ran over 500 
miles for charity during the year, raising many thousands of 
pounds for good causes. 

Dividend

The Group’s loss for the year attributable to owners of the 
parent for 2016 was £18.3m (2015: Loss of £12.0m). The 
Directors do not recommend a final dividend in relation to the 
2016 financial year (2015: Nil).

Auditors

Following a tender process, the Company appointed KPMG 
LLP as auditor to replace BDO LLP in 2016. 

Resolutions regarding the of appoint KPMG LLP as auditor to 
the Company will be put to shareholders at the Annual General 
Meeting to be held on 7 March 2017 (details on page 81).

The information set out below is contained in other areas of this report.

Financial instruments

Details of the Group’s financial risk management objectives and policies 
including the Group’s policy for hedging, and the exposure of the Company and its 
subsidiaries to price risk, credit risk, liquidity risk and cash flow risk. 

Page(s) of this report

102–105

Important events

Particulars of important events affecting the Company or its subsidiaries.

11–15, 19–37, 47–55

Post balance sheet events

Description of post balance sheet events. 

None

Future developments

Likely future developments in the business of the Company or its subsidiaries.

11–18, 47–55

Research and development

Details of research and development activities of the Company and its subsidiaries.

20–26, 33

Branches outside the UK

Details of the existence of branches outside the UK.

Risk management 

Details of the Company’s risk management framework, activities in the year and 
principal risks and uncertainties 

Directors’ remuneration and interests

Details of Directors’ remuneration, interests in shares of the Company, share 
options and pension arrangements. 

8

56–59

74–79

Principal activities and business review

Business review, details of 2016 results, key performance indicators, outlook for 
future years. 

11–15, 19–37, 47–55

Financial risk management 

Objectives and policies for management of financial risk. 

Share capital

Details of the issued share capital and movements during the year.

72–73

130

This report was approved by the Board on 23 January 2017 and signed on its behalf. 

Athene Blakeman
Company Secretary 
24 January 2017

DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in relation  
to the Group financial statements and Annual Report

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Strategic 
Report, the Directors’ Report and the financial statements  
in accordance with applicable law and regulation. 

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial 
statements for each financial year. Under that law, the Directors 
have elected to prepare the Group and Company financial 
statements in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards (IFRS) as adopted by the European 
Union. Under company law, the Directors must not approve  
the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they 
give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group 
and Company, and of the profit or loss of the Group and 
Company for that period. The Directors are also required to 
prepare financial statements in accordance with the rules of 
the London Stock Exchange for companies whose securities 
are traded on the Alternative Investment Market.

In preparing these financial statements, the Directors  
are required to:

•  Select suitable accounting policies and apply  

them consistently

•  Make judgements and accounting estimates that  

are reasonable and prudent

•  State whether the financial statements have been  

prepared in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the 
European Union, subject to any material departures 
disclosed and explained in the financial statements

•  Prepare the financial statements on a going concern  
basis unless it is inappropriate to assume that the 
Company will continue its business

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Governance

83

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

03 
Financial 
Statements

86 

87 

88 

89 

 Independent  
Auditor’s Report

 Consolidated  
Income Statement

 Consolidated Statement  
of Comprehensive Income

 Consolidated  
Balance Sheet

90  Company Balance Sheet

91 

92 

93 

94 

95 

 Consolidated Statement  
of Changes in Equity

 Company Statement  
of Changes in Equity

 Consolidated Statement  
of Cash Flows

 Company Statement  
of Cash Flows

 Notes Forming Part of the 
Financial Statements

Independent Auditor's report to the members of Benchmark Holdings plc

for the year ended 30 September 2016

Consolidated Income Statement

for the year ended 30 September 2016

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

We have audited the financial statements of Benchmark 
Holdings plc for the year ended 30 September 2016 
which comprise the Consolidated Income Statement, the 
Consolidated and Company Balance Sheets, the Consolidated 
Statement of Comprehensive Income, the Consolidated and 
Company Statement of Changes in Equity, the Consolidated 
and Company Statement of Cash Flows and the related notes. 
The financial reporting framework that has been applied in 
their preparation is applicable law and International Financial 
Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the EU and, as 
regards the parent company financial statements, as applied 
in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006. 

This report is made solely to the company’s members, 
as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the 
Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so 
that we might state to the company’s members those matters 
we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for 
no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we 
do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than 
the company and the company’s members as a body, for our 
audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Respective responsibilities of directors and 
auditors

As explained more fully in the statement of directors’ 
responsibilities, set out on page 83, the directors are 
responsible for the preparation of the financial statements 
and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. 
Our responsibility is to audit and express an opinion on the 
financial statements in accordance with applicable law and 
International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). Those 
standards require us to comply with the Auditing Practices 
Board’s Ethical Standards for Auditors. 

Scope of the audit of the financial statements

A description of the scope of an audit of financial statements 
is provided on the Financial Reporting Council’s website at 
www.frc.org.uk/auditscopeukprivate.

Opinion on financial statements

In our opinion: 

• 

• 

• 

• 

the financial statements give a true and fair view of the 
state of the group’s and the parent company’s affairs as at 
30 September 2016 and of the group’s loss for the year 
then ended;

the group financial statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU;

the parent company financial statements have been 
properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by 
the EU and as applied in accordance with the provisions of 
the Companies Act 2006; and

the financial statements have been prepared in 
accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 
2006.

Opinion on other matters prescribed by the 
Companies Act 2006

In our opinion the information given in the strategic report and 
directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial 
statements are prepared is consistent with the financial 
statements. 

Matters on which we are required to report by 
exception

We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters 
where the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to you if, 
in our opinion:

•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the 
parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have 
not been received from branches not visited by us; or

• 

the parent company financial statements are not in 
agreement with the accounting records and returns; or

•  certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by 

law are not made; or

•  we have not received all the information and explanations 

we require for our audit.

Ian Beaumont  
for and on behalf of KPMG LLP 

Chartered Accountants  
1 Sovereign Square, Sovereign Street, Leeds, LS1 4DA 
24 January 2017

Revenue

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Operating costs

Operating costs — Exceptional

EBITDA3

Depreciation

Amortisation

Operating profit/(loss)

Finance costs

Finance income

Share of profit of equity-accounted investees, 
net of tax

Profit/(loss) on ordinary activities before 
taxation

Trading 
Activities1
2016
£000

Investing 
Activities2
2016
£000

Total
2016
£000

Trading 
Activities1
2015
£000

Investing 
Activities2
2015
£000

Note

4

109,375 

(58,562)

50,813 

- 

- 

- 

109,375 

44,199 

(58,562)

(28,102)

50,813 

16,097 

- 

- 

- 

Total
2015
£000

44,199 

(28,102)

16,097 

26

10

13

14

9

9

(28,502)

(26,028)

(54,530)

(13,674)

(9,494)

(23,168)

- 

(146)

(146)

- 

(160)

(160)

22,311 

(26,174)

(3,863)

2,423 

(9,654)

(7,231)

(2,609)

(250)

(2,859)

(1,113)

(13,504)

(245)

(13,749)

(2,825)

(191)

(239)

(1,304)

(3,064)

6,198 

(26,669)

(20,471)

(1,515)

(10,084)

(11,599)

(6,170)

3,984 

273 

- 

- 

- 

(6,170)

3,984 

273 

(34)

260 

- 

- 

14 

- 

(34)

274 

- 

4,285 

(26,669)

(22,384)

(1,289)

(10,070)

(11,359)

Tax on profit/(loss) on ordinary activities

11,26

3,187 

851 

4,038 

(751)

355 

(396)

Profit/(loss) for the year

7,472 

(25,818)

(18,346)

(2,040)

(9,715)

(11,755)

Profit/(loss) for the year attributable to:

— Owners of the parent

— Non-controlling interest

7,481 

(25,818)

(18,337)

(2,273)

(9,715)

(11,988)

(9)

- 

(9)

233 

- 

233 

7,472 

(25,818)

(18,346)

(2,040)

(9,715)

(11,755)

Basic earnings/(loss) per share (pence)

Diluted earnings/(loss) per share (pence)

12

12

1.79 

1.78 

(4.39)

(4.39)

(1.13)

(1.13)

(5.96)

(5.96)

1 Before items described in footnote 2 below.

2  Includes exceptional items (outlined in note 10), research and development expenditure, pre-operational expenses for new ventures and costs of acquiring 

new businesses as set out in note 26.

3 EBITDA — Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation

86

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Independent Auditor's report to the members of Benchmark Holdings plc 

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Consolidated Income Statement 

87

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

for the year ended 30 September 2016

Consolidated Balance Sheet

as at 30 September 2016

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Profit/(loss) for the year

7,472 

(25,818)

(18,346)

(2,040)

(9,715)

(11,755)

Trading 
Activities1
2016
£000

Investing 
Activities2
2016
£000

Total
2016
£000

Trading 
Activities1
2015
£000

Investing 
Activities2
2015
£000

Total
2015
£000

Other comprehensive income/(expense)

Items that are or may be reclassified subsequently to profit 
or loss

Movement on foreign exchange reserve

48,386 

- 

48,386 

(2,812)

- 

(2,812)

Total comprehensive income/(expense) for the year

55,858 

(25,818)

30,040 

(4,852)

(9,715)

(14,567)

Total comprehensive income/(expense) for the year 
attributable to:

— Owners of the parent

— Non-controlling interest

55,571 

(25,818)

29,753 

(5,071)

(9,715)

(14,786)

287 

- 

287 

219 

- 

219 

55,858 

(25,818)

30,040 

(4,852)

(9,715)

(14,567)

1 Before items described in footnote 2 below.

2  Includes exceptional items (outlined in note 10), research and development expenditure, pre-operational expenses for new ventures and costs of acquiring 

new businesses as set out in note 26.

Assets

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets

Investments, including associates

Trade and other receivables

Biological and agricultural assets

Total non-current assets

Current assets

Inventories

Biological and agricultural assets

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Liabilities

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Loans and borrowings

Corporation tax liability

Provisions

Total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Loans and borrowings

Other payables

Deferred tax

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Issued capital and reserves attributable to owners of the parent

Share capital

Share premium reserve

Capital redemption reserve

Retained earnings

Foreign exchange reserve

Equity attributable to owners of the parent

Non-controlling interest

Total equity and reserves

Notes

2016
£000

2015
£000

13

14

19

18

17

18

19

34

20

21

50,023 

25,141 

352,538 

65,872 

827 

- 

147 

293 

5,028 

3,392 

408,416 

94,845 

23,231 

6,831 

5,359 

4,948 

34,288 

15,353 

38,140 

13,564 

102,490 

39,224 

510,906 

134,069 

(31,232)

(24,368)

(289)

(1,107)

(63)

(860)

22

(1,086)

(1,033)

(33,714)

(26,324)

21

20

23

24

24

25

25

25

(37,407)

(93)

(8,825)

(7,330)

(63,261)

(8,224)

(109,493)

(15,647)

(143,207)

(41,971)

367,699 

92,098 

521 

219 

339,431 

94,672 

5 

5 

(18,904)

(1,021)

45,365 

(2,724)

366,418 

91,151 

1,281 

947 

367,699 

92,098 

88

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income 

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Consolidated Balance Sheet 

89

The financial statements on pages 87 to 139 were approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 24 January 
2017 and were signed on its behalf by:

M J Plampin 
Chief Financial Officer

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company Balance Sheet

as at 30 September 2016

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity

for the year ended 30 September 2016

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Assets

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Investments, including associates

Deferred tax assets

Total non-current assets

Current assets

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Liabilities

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Loans and borrowings

Other payables

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Issued capital and reserves attributable to owners of the parent

Share capital

Share premium reserve

Capital redemption reserve

Retained earnings

Total equity and reserves

Note

2016
£000

2015
£000

13

16

23

19

34

240

154

261,902

29,502

-

170

262,142

29,826

101,489

70,280

27,480

5,542

128,969

75,822

391,111

105,648

20

(26,102)

(8,542)

(26,102)

(8,542)

21

20

24

24

25

25

(37,193)

-

(37,193)

(60)

(351)

(411)

(63,295)

(8,953)

327,816

96,695

521

219

339,431

94,672

5

5

(12,141)

1,799

327,816

96,695

The financial statements on pages 87 to 139 were approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 24 January 
2017 and were signed on its behalf by:

MJ Plampin 
Chief Financial Officer

 Share  
capital 
 £000 

 Share  
premium  
reserve 
 £000 

 Other  
reserves 
 £000 

 Retained 
  earnings 
 £000 

 Total 
attributable 
 to equity 
holders of  
parent 
 £000 

 Non- 
controlling 
interest 
 £000 

 Total 
equity 
 £000 

As at 1 October 2014

137 

26,903 

79 

10,123 

37,242 

10 

37,252 

Comprehensive income for the year

(Loss)/profit for the year

Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income for the year

Contributions by and distributions to owners

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(11,988)

(11,988)

233 

(11,755)

(2,798)

(2,798)

(14)

(2,812)

(2,798)

(11,988)

(14,786)

219 

(14,567)

Share issue

82 

69,918 

Share issue costs recognised through 
equity

Share based payment

Deferred tax on share options

Acquisition of non-controlling interest

Total contributions by and distributions to 
owners

- 

- 

- 

- 

(2,149)

- 

- 

- 

82 

67,769 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

748 

96 

- 

70,000 

(2,149)

748 

96 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

718 

70,000 

(2,149)

748 

96 

718 

844 

68,695 

718 

69,413 

As at 30 September 2015

219 

94,672 

(2,719)

(1,021)

91,151 

947 

92,098 

Comprehensive income for the year

Loss for the year

Other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income for the year

Contributions by and distributions to owners

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(18,337)

(18,337)

(9)

(18,346)

48,089 

- 

48,089 

48,089 

(18,337)

29,752 

297 

288 

48,386 

30,040 

Share issue

302 

249,444 

Share issue costs recognised through equity

Share based payment

Deferred tax on share options

- 

- 

- 

(4,685)

- 

- 

Total contributions by and distributions to 
owners

302 

244,759 

Changes in ownership 

Acquisition of subsidiary with non-controlling 
interests

Total changes in ownership interests

Total transactions with owners of the 
Company

- 

- 

- 

- 

302 

244,759 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

249,746 

(4,685)

749 

(295)

749 

(295)

454 

245,515 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

46 

46 

249,746 

(4,685)

749 

(295)

245,515 

46 

46 

454 

245,515 

46 

245,561 

As at 30 September 2016 

521 

339,431 

45,370 

(18,904)

366,418 

1,281 

367,699 

90

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Company Balance Sheet 

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity 

91

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company Statement of Changes in Equity

for the year ended 30 September 2016

Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows

for the year ended 30 September 2016

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

At 1 October 2014

Comprehensive income for the year

Loss for the year

Total comprehensive income for the year

Contributions by and distributions to owners

Share based payment

Deferred tax on share options

Share issue

Share issue costs recognised through equity

Total contributions by and distributions to owners

Share 
capital
£000

Share 
premium 
reserve 
£000

Capital 
redemption 
reserve
£000

Retained 
earnings
£000

Total 
attributable 
to equity 
holders
£000

137

26,903

5

8,854

35,899

-

-

-

-

82

-

82

-

-

-

-

69,918

(2,149)

67,769

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(7,807)

(7,807)

(7,807)

(7,807)

748

4

-

-

748

4

70,000

(2,149)

752

68,603

At 30 September 2015

219

94,672

5

1,799

96,695

Comprehensive income for the year

Loss for the year

Total comprehensive income for the year

Contributions by and distributions to owners

Share based payment

Deferred tax on share options

Share issue

Share issue costs recognised through equity

Total contributions by and distributions to owners

At 30 September 2016

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

302

249,444

-

(4,685)

302

521

244,759

339,431

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(14,646)

(14,646)

(14,646)

(14,646)

749

(43)

-

-

749

(43)

249,746

(4,685)

706

245,767

5

(12,141)

327,816

Cash flows from operating activities

Loss for the year

Adjustments for:

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

Amortisation of intangible fixed assets

Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment

Finance income

Finance costs

Share of profit of equity-accounted investees, net of tax

Foreign exchange losses/(gains)

Share based payment expense

Tax (credit)/expense

(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables

Increase in inventories and biological assets

Decrease in trade and other payables

Decrease in provisions

Income taxes paid

Net cash flows used in operating activities

Investing activities

Acquisition of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired

Purchase of investments

Purchases of property, plant and equipment

Purchase of intangibles

Proceeds from sale of fixed assets

Interest received

Net cash flows used in investing activities

Financing activities

Proceeds of share issues

Proceeds from bank borrowings

Share-issue costs recognised through equity

Net cash flows from derivative financial instruments

Repayment of bank borrowings

Interest and finance charges paid

Payments to finance lease creditors

Net cash inflow from financing activities

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

Notes

2016
£000 

2015
£000

13

14

9

9

30

11

(18,346)

(11,755)

2,859 

13,749 

30 

1,304 

3,064 

21 

(3,984)

(274)

6,170 

(273)

34 

- 

6,776 

(1,445)

749 

(4,038)

458 

396 

3,692 

(8,197)

(3,729)

(4,704)

2,503 

(468)

(4,124)

(2,645)

(238)

(47)

(9,103)

(8,854)

(1,429)

(105)

(10,532)

(8,959)

(191,502)

(47,568)

- 

(52)

(18,660)

(14,038)

(1,523)

(182)

174 

254 

148 

274 

(211,257)

(61,418)

216,519 

70,000 

42,254 

- 

(4,685)

(2,149)

3,731 

- 

(8,809)

(2,481)

(164)

(332)

(34)

(55)

246,365 

67,430 

24,576 

(2,947)

13,564 

16,511 

34

38,140 

13,564 

92

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Company Statement of Changes in Equity 

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows 

93

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company Statement of Cash Flows
Company Statement of Cash Flows

for the year ended 30 September 2016
for the year ended 30 September 2016

Notes forming part of the financial statements

for the year ended 30 September 2016

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Cash flows from operating activities

Loss for the year

Adjustments for:

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

Provision for impairment of investments

Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment

Finance income

Finance expense

Share based payment expense

Tax expense/credit

Increase in trade and other receivables

Increase in trade and other payables

Net cash flows used in operating activities

Investing activities

Loans to subsidiary undertakings

Repayment of loan from subsidiary undertaking

Investment in subsidiary undertakings

Purchases of property, plant and equipment

Interest received

Net cash flows used in investing activities

Financing activities

Proceeds of share issues

Proceeds from bank borrowings

Share issue costs recognised through equity

Net cash flows from derivative financial instruments

Repayment of bank borrowings

Interest paid

Net cash inflow from financing activities

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

Note

2016
£000

2015
£000

1  Accounting policies

Corporate information 

13

16

30

(14,646)

(7,807)

62

-

-

22

850

5

(4,018)

(117)

6,219

149

127

-

128

(119)

(12,107)

(7,038)

(34,001)

(42,680)

17,207

1,998

(28,901)

(47,720)

-

(8,902)

1,659

-

(197,440)

(19,767)

(148)

288

(115)

117

(195,641)

(28,667)

216,519

70,000

42,254

-

(4,685)

(2,149)

3,731

(8,809)

(2,530)

-

-

-

246,480

67,851

21,938

(8,536)

5,542

14,078

34

27,480

5,542

Benchmark Holdings plc (the Company) is a public limited 
company, which is listed on the Alternative Investment 
Market (AIM), a sub-market of the London Stock 
Exchange. The Company is incorporated and domiciled in 
England and Wales. The registered office is at Benchmark 
House, 8 Smithy Wood Drive, Sheffield, S35 1QN.

The Group is principally engaged in the provision of 
technical services, products and specialist knowledge 
that support the global development of sustainable food 
and farming industries. 

Basis of preparation

The principal accounting policies adopted in the 
preparation of the financial statements are set out 
below. The policies have been consistently applied to 
all the years presented, unless otherwise stated. The 
Group’s business activities, together with the factors 
likely to affect its future development, performance 
and position are set out in the Chairman’s Statement, 
the FY16 Financial Review and the Audit Committee 
Report. As at 30 September 2016 the Group had net 
assets of £367.7 million, including cash of £38.1 million 
(2015: £13.6 million) as set out in the consolidated 
balance sheet on page 89 and a five year revolving credit 
facility of US$70.0 million, of which US$50 million is 
currently drawn down and which expires in 2020. 

The Directors have considered these factors, together 
with the results for the year and the likely future 
performance of the business and possible alternative 
outcomes and the financing activities available to 
the Group. Having taken all of these factors into 
consideration, including the impact on covenants relating 
to the external borrowing facility, the Directors confirm 
that forecasts and projections indicate that the Group 
and its Parent Company have adequate resources for 
the foreseeable future and at least for the period of 
12 months from the date of signing the half year report. 
Accordingly, the financial information has been prepared 
on the going concern basis.

These financial statements have been prepared in 
accordance with International Financial Reporting 
Standards, International Accounting Standards and 
Interpretations (collectively IFRSs) issued by the 
International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) as 
adopted by the European Union (“adopted IFRSs”) 
and those parts of the Companies Act 2006 that 
are applicable to companies that prepare financial 
statements in accordance with IFRS.

The preparation of financial statements in compliance 
with adopted IFRS requires the use of certain 
critical accounting estimates. It also requires Group 
management to exercise judgement in applying the 
Group’s accounting policies. The areas where significant 
judgements and estimates have been made in preparing 

the financial statements and their effect are disclosed in 
note 2.

Basis of consolidation

The consolidated financial statements comprise the 
financial statements of the Group and its subsidiaries 
at 30 September 2016. Subsidiaries are consolidated 
from the date of acquisition, being the date on which the 
Group obtained control, and continue to be consolidated 
until the date when such control ceases.

Where the Company has power, either directly or 
indirectly, over another entity or business and the ability 
to use this power to affect the amount of returns, as 
well as exposure or rights to variable returns from 
its involvement with the investee, it is classified as 
a subsidiary. The consolidated financial statements 
present the results of the Company and its subsidiaries 
(“the Group”) as if they formed a single entity. 
Intercompany transactions, balances, unrealised gains 
and losses resulting from intra- Group transactions and 
dividends are eliminated in full.

The consolidated financial statements incorporate the 
results of business combinations using the acquisition 
method. In the consolidated balance sheet, the 
acquiree’s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent 
liabilities are initially recognised at their fair values at 
the acquisition date.

Non-controlling interests, presented as part of equity, 
represent a proportion of a subsidiary’s profit or loss 
and net assets that is not held by the Group. The total 
comprehensive income or loss of non-wholly owned 
subsidiaries is attributed to owners of the parent and 
to the non-controlling interests in proportion to their 
respective ownership interests.

A separate income statement for the Company is not 
presented, in accordance with Section 408 of the 
Companies Act 2006. The loss for the year for the 
Company was £14,646,000 (2015: loss £7,807,000).

Standards issued but not effective

A number of new standards, amendments to standards 
and interpretations are not yet effective, and have not 
been applied in preparing these consolidated financial 
statements. Those which may be relevant to the Group 
are set out below. The adoption of these standards is 
not expected to have a material effect on the financial 
statements unless otherwise indicated:

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments: Classification and 
Measurement has been issued but is not yet effective. 
The standard has been developed in several phases 
and replaces IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition 
and Measurement in its entirety. The effective date 
of the fully completed version of IFRS 9 is for periods 
beginning on or after 1 January 2018 with retrospective 
application. The Group has not yet quantified the full 
impact of all phases of the final standard. It is expected 
that the Group will adopt IFRS 9 on 1 October 2018.

94

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Company Statement of Cash Flows

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

95

1  Accounting policies (continued)

IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers, which 
has been issued but has an effective date of 1 January 
2018. IFRS 15 supersedes IAS 11 Construction 
Contracts, IAS 18 Revenue, IFRIC 13 Customer Loyalty 
Programmes, IFRIC 15 Agreements for the Construction 
of Real Estate, IFRIC 18 Transfers of Assets from 
Customers and SIC 31 Revenue — Barter Transactions 
Involving Advertising Services. The Group has not yet 
quantified the potential impact of this standard. It is 
expected the Group will adopt IFRS 15 on 1 October 
2018.

IFRS 16 Leases introduces a single, on-balance sheet 
accounting model for lessees which has an effective 
date of 1 January 2019. The Group has not yet 
quantified the potential impact of this standard. It is 
expected that the Group will adopt IFRS 16 on 1 October 
2019.

New standards and interpretations applied  
for the first time

The following standards with an effective date of either 
1 January 2015 or 1 February 2015 have been adopted 
without any significant impact on the amounts reported 
in these financial statements:

Annual Improvements to IFRSs 2010–2012 Cycle  
— various standards 

Annual Improvements to IFRSs 2011–2013 Cycle  
— various standards

Revenue

Revenue is recognised to the extent that it is probable 
that the economic benefits will flow to the Group and the 
revenue can be reliably measured, regardless of when 
the payment is being made. Revenue is measured at the 
fair value of consideration received or receivable, taking 
into account contractually defined terms of payment 
and excluding taxes or duty. The Group assesses its 
revenue arrangements against specific criteria in order 
to determine if it is acting as a principal or agent. The 
Group has concluded that it is acting as a principal in 
all of its revenue arrangements. The following specific 
criteria must also be met before revenue is recognised: 

Sale of goods

Within Benchmark Animal Health, revenue from the sale 
of licenced veterinary vaccines and vaccine components 
is recognised when the Group has transferred the 
significant risks and rewards of ownership to the buyer, 
usually on despatch. Where the buyer has a right of 
return, revenue and cost of sales are adjusted for 
the value of the expected returns based on historical 
results, taking into consideration the specifics of each 
arrangement. 

Within Benchmark Sustainability Science, revenue from 
the sale of agricultural produce is recognised when the 
Group has transferred the significant risks and rewards 
of ownership to the buyer, usually on delivery. Where the 
buyer has a right of return, revenue and cost of sales are 
adjusted for the value of the expected returns based on 

historical results, taking into consideration the specifics 
of each arrangement.

Within Benchmark Technical Publishing, revenue from the 
sales of books and publications is recognised when the 
Group has transferred the significant risks and rewards 
of ownership to the buyer, usually on despatch.

Within Benchmark Breeding and Genetics, revenue from 
the sale of eggs is recognised upon despatch, which is 
when the risks and rewards of ownership are considered 
to have passed to the customer.

Within Benchmark Advanced Animal Nutrition, revenue 
of advanced nutrition and health products is recognised 
when the Group has transferred the significant risks and 
rewards of ownership to the buyer, usually on despatch.

Rendering of services

Services including sustainable food production 
consultancy, technical consultancy and assurance 
services are provided by Benchmark Sustainability 
Science, Benchmark Animal Health, Benchmark Breeding 
and Genetics and Benchmark Advanced Animal Nutrition. 
Online news, marketing and technical publications, 
book publishing, online shops, online distance learning 
programs and other training courses are provided by 
Benchmark Technical Publishing.

Provided the amount of revenue can be measured 
reliably and it is probable that the Group will receive any 
consideration, revenue for these services is recognised 
in the period in which they are rendered.

Business combinations 

Business combinations are accounted for using the 
acquisition method. The consideration transferred for 
the acquisition of a subsidiary is the fair values of the 
assets transferred, the liabilities incurred to the former 
owners of the acquiree and the equity interests issued 
by the Group. The consideration transferred includes the 
fair value of asset or liability resulting from a contingent 
consideration arrangement. Identifiable assets acquired 
and liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a 
business combination are measured initially at their fair 
values at the acquisition date. The Group recognises 
any non-controlling interest in the acquiree on an 
acquisition by acquisition basis, either at fair value or 
at the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of 
the recognised amounts of acquiree’s identifiable net 
assets.

Transaction costs, other than share and debt issue 
costs, are expensed as incurred. In accordance with 
IFRS 3 — Business Combinations, the Group has 
a twelve-month period in which to finalise the fair 
values allocated to assets and liabilities determined 
provisionally on acquisition.

Contingent consideration is measured at fair value 
based on an estimate of the expected future payments. 
Deferred consideration is measured at the present value 
of the obligation.

If the business combination is achieved in stages, the 
previously held equity interest is remeasured at its 
acquisition date fair value and any resulting gain or loss 
is recognised in the consolidated income statement. 

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

1  Accounting policies (continued)

Foreign currency

The Group’s consolidated financial statements are 
presented in UK pounds sterling, which is also the 
parent Company’s functional currency. The Group 
determines the functional currency of each of its 
subsidiaries and items included in the financial 
statements of each of those entities are measured using 
that functional currency.

Transactions entered into by Group entities in a currency 
other than the currency of the primary economic 
environment in which they operate (their “functional 
currency”) are recorded at the rates ruling when the 
transactions occur. Foreign currency monetary assets 
and liabilities are translated at the rates ruling at the 
reporting date. Exchange differences arising on the 
retranslation of unsettled monetary assets and liabilities 
are recognised immediately in the consolidated income 
statement.

On consolidation, the results of overseas operations 
are translated into sterling at rates approximating 
to those ruling when the transactions took place. All 
assets and liabilities of overseas operations, including 
goodwill arising on the acquisition of those operations, 
are translated at the rate ruling at the reporting date. 
Exchange differences arising on translating the opening 
net assets at opening rate and the results of overseas 
operations at actual rate are recognised in other 
comprehensive income and accumulated in the foreign 
exchange reserve. 

Exchange differences recognised in the income 
statement in the Group entities’ separate financial 
statements on the translation of long-term monetary 
items forming part of the Group’s net investment in the 
overseas operation concerned are reclassified to other 
comprehensive income and accumulated in the foreign 
exchange reserve on consolidation.

On disposal of a foreign operation, the cumulative 
exchange differences recognised in the foreign exchange 
reserve relating to that operation up to the date of 
disposal are transferred to the consolidated income 
statement as part of the profit or loss on disposal.

Financial assets

The Group classifies all of its financial assets as loans 
and receivables and has not classified any of its financial 
assets as held to maturity.

Loans and receivable assets are non-derivative financial 
assets with fixed or determinable payments that are not 
quoted in an active market. They arise principally through 
the provision of goods and services to customers 
(e.g. trade receivables), but also incorporate other 
types of contractual monetary asset. They are initially 
recognised at fair value plus transaction costs that 
are directly attributable to their acquisition or issue, 
and are subsequently carried at amortised cost using 
the effective interest rate method, less provision for 
impairment. 

Impairment provisions are recognised when there 
is objective evidence (such as significant financial 
difficulties on the part of the counterparty or default 
or significant delay in payment) that the Group will be 
unable to collect all of the amounts due under the 
terms of the receivable, the amount of such a provision 
being the difference between the net carrying amount 
and the present value of the future expected cash 
flows associated with the impaired receivable. For trade 
receivables, which are reported net, such provisions 
are recorded in a separate allowance account with the 
loss being recognised within operating costs in the 
consolidated income statement. On confirmation that 
the trade receivable will not be collectable, the gross 
carrying value of the asset is written off against the 
associated provision.

From time to time, the Group elects to renegotiate the 
terms of trade receivables due from customers with 
which it has previously had a good trading history. Such 
renegotiations will lead to changes in the timing of 
payments rather than changes to the amounts owed 
and, in consequence, the new expected cash flows are 
discounted at the original effective interest rate and any 
resulting difference to the carrying value is recognised in 
the consolidated income statement (operating profit).

The Group’s loans and receivables comprise trade and 
other receivables and cash and cash equivalents in the 
consolidated balance sheet. 

Cash and cash equivalents includes cash in hand, 
deposits held at call with banks, other short term highly 
liquid investments with original maturities of three 
months or less from inception, and for the purpose of 
the statements of cash flows, bank overdrafts. Bank 
overdrafts are shown within loans and borrowings in 
current liabilities on the consolidated balance sheet.

Financial liabilities

The Group classifies its financial liabilities as other 
financial liabilities which include the following items:

•  Bank borrowings which are initially recognised at fair 

value net of any transaction costs directly attributable 
to the issue of the instrument. Such interest bearing 
liabilities are subsequently measured at amortised 
cost using the effective interest rate method, which 
ensures that any interest expense over the period to 
repayment is at a constant rate on the balance of the 
liability carried in the consolidated balance sheet. 

•  Trade payables and other short-term monetary 

liabilities, which are initially recognised at fair value 
and subsequently carried at amortised cost using the 
effective interest method. 

Financial liabilities fair value through profit and loss

Contingent consideration is recognised at fair value 
with movements recognised in the consolidated income 
statement.

Share capital

The Group’s ordinary shares are classified as equity 
instruments.

96

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

97

1  Accounting policies (continued)

Retirement benefits: Defined contribution schemes

Contributions to defined contribution pension schemes 
are charged to the income statement in the year to 
which they relate.

Share-based payments

Where equity settled share options are awarded to 
employees, the fair value of the options at the date of 
grant is charged to the consolidated income statement 
over the vesting period. Non-market vesting conditions 
are taken into account by adjusting the number of equity 
instruments expected to vest at each reporting date 
so that, ultimately, the cumulative amount recognised 
over the vesting period is based on the number of 
options that eventually vest. Non-vesting conditions 
and market vesting conditions are factored into the fair 
value of the options granted. As long as all other vesting 
conditions are satisfied, a charge is made irrespective of 
whether the market vesting conditions are satisfied. The 
cumulative expense is not adjusted for failure to achieve 
a market vesting condition or where a non-vesting 
condition is not satisfied.

Where the terms and conditions of options are modified 
before they vest, the increase in the fair value of the 
options, measured immediately before and after the 
modification, is also charged to the consolidated income 
statement over the remaining vesting period.

Leased assets

Where substantially all of the risks and rewards 
incidental to ownership of a leased asset have been 
transferred to the Group (a “finance lease”), the asset is 
treated as if it had been purchased outright. The amount 
initially recognised as an asset is the lower of the fair 
value of the leased property and the present value of the 
minimum lease payments payable over the term of the 
lease. The corresponding lease commitment is shown as 
a liability. Lease payments are analysed between capital 
and interest. The interest element is charged to the 
consolidated income statement over the period of the 
lease and is calculated so that it represents a constant 
proportion of the lease liability. The capital element 
reduces the balance owed to the lessor.

Where substantially all of the risks and rewards 
incidental to ownership are not transferred to the Group 
(an “operating lease”), the total rentals payable under 
the lease are charged to the consolidated income 
statement on a straight-line basis over the lease term. 
The aggregate benefit of lease incentives is recognised 
as a reduction of the rental expense over the lease term 
on a straight-line basis.

Goodwill

Goodwill is initially measured at cost, being the excess 
of the cost of a business combination over the total 
acquisition date fair value of the identifiable assets, 
liabilities and contingent liabilities acquired. Goodwill is 
capitalised as an intangible asset with any impairment in 
carrying value being charged to the consolidated income 
statement. Where the fair value of identifiable assets, 

liabilities and contingent liabilities exceed the fair value 
of consideration paid, the excess is credited in full to the 
consolidated income statement on the acquisition date.

Externally acquired intangible assets

Externally acquired intangible assets are initially 
recognised at cost and subsequently amortised over their 
useful economic lives as outlined below, on a straight-line 
basis from the time they are available for use. 

Intangible assets are recognised on business 
combinations if they are separable from the acquired 
entity or give rise to other contractual/legal rights. The 
amounts ascribed to such intangibles are arrived at by 
using appropriate valuation techniques (see section 
related to critical estimates and judgements below).

In-process research and development programmes 
acquired in such combinations are recognised as an 
asset, even if subsequent expenditure is written off 
because it does not meet the criteria specified in the 
policy for development costs below.

The significant intangibles recognised by the Group, 
their useful economic lives and the methods used to 
determine the cost of intangibles acquired in a business 
combination are as follows:

Intangible asset

Useful 
economic life

Websites

5 years 

Valuation method

Assessment of 
estimated revenues 
and profits

Patents

2-5 years

Cost to acquire

Trademarks

2-5 years

Cost to acquire

Contracts

3-20 years

Licences

3-20 years

Assessment of 
estimated revenues 
and profits

Cost to acquire, or 
if not separately 
identifiable, 
assessment of 
estimated revenues 
and profits

Intellectual 
property

Up to 20 years Cost to acquire, or 

if not separately 
identifiable, 
assessment of 
estimated revenues 
and profits

Customer lists

Up to 26 years Assessment of 

Genetic material 
and breeding 
nuclei

10-40 years

estimated revenues 
and profits

Cost to acquire, or 
if not separately 
identifiable, 
assessment of 
estimated revenues 
and profits

Development 
costs

Up to 10 years Cost to acquire

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

1  Accounting policies (continued)

Impairment of non-financial assets (excluding inventories)

The carrying values of all non-current assets are 
reviewed for impairment, either on a stand-alone basis 
or as part of a larger cash generating unit, when there 
is an indication that the assets might be impaired. 
Additionally, goodwill, intangible assets with indefinite 
useful lives and intangible assets which are not yet 
available for use are tested for impairment annually. 
Where the carrying value of an asset exceeds its 
recoverable amount (i.e. the higher of value in use and 
fair value less costs to sell), the asset is written down 
accordingly.

Where it is not possible to estimate the recoverable 
amount of an individual asset, the impairment test is 
carried out on the smallest group of assets to which it 
belongs for which there are separately identifiable cash 
flows; its cash generating units (‘CGUs’). Goodwill is 
allocated on initial recognition to each of the Group’s 
CGUs that are expected to benefit from the synergies of 
the combination giving rise to the goodwill.

Impairment charges are included in the consolidated 
income statement, except to the extent they reverse 
gains previously recognised in other comprehensive 
income. An impairment loss recognised for goodwill is 
not reversed.

Internally generated intangible assets  
(development costs)

Expenditure on internally developed products is 
capitalised if it can be demonstrated that:

• 

it is technically feasible to develop the product for it 
to be sold;

•  adequate resources are available to complete the 

development;

•  there is an intention to complete and sell the product;

•  the Group is able to sell the product;

•  sale of the product will generate future economic 

benefits; and

•  expenditure on the project can be measured reliably.

Capitalised development costs are amortised over 
the periods the Group expects to benefit from selling 
the products developed. The amortisation expense is 
included within the cost of sales line in the consolidated 
income statement.

Development expenditure not satisfying the above 
criteria and expenditure on the research phase of 
internal projects are recognised in the consolidated 
income statement as incurred.

Deferred taxation

•  the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a 
transaction which is not a business combination 
and at the time of the transaction affects neither 
accounting or taxable profit; and

• 

investments in subsidiaries and jointly controlled 
entities where the Group is able to control the timing 
of the reversal of the difference and it is probable 
that the difference will not reverse in the foreseeable 
future.

Recognition of deferred tax assets is restricted to those 
instances where it is probable that taxable profit will be 
available against which the difference can be utilised. 
The carrying amount of deferred tax asset is reviewed 
at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent 
that it is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profits 
will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be 
recovered.

The amount of the asset or liability is determined using 
tax rates that have been enacted or substantively 
enacted by the reporting date and are expected to apply 
when the deferred tax liabilities/assets are settled/
recovered. 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when the 
Group has a legally enforceable right to offset current tax 
assets and liabilities and the deferred tax assets and 
liabilities relate to taxes levied by the same tax authority 
on either:

•  the same taxable Group company; or

•  different Group entities which intend either to settle 
current tax assets and liabilities on a net basis, 
or to realise the assets and settle the liabilities 
simultaneously, in each future period in which 
significant amounts of deferred tax assets or 
liabilities are expected to be settled or recovered.

Property, plant and equipment

Items of property, plant and equipment are initially 
recognised at cost. As well as the purchase price, cost 
includes directly attributable costs and the estimated 
present value of any future unavoidable costs of 
dismantling and removing items. The corresponding 
liability is recognised within provisions.

Freehold land is not depreciated. Assets in the course 
of construction which have not yet been brought into 
use are not depreciated until fully commissioned and 
available for use. Depreciation is provided on all other 
items of property, plant and equipment so as to write off 
their carrying value over their expected useful economic 
lives. It is provided at the following rates: 

Freehold property

– 2% per annum straight line

Long term 
leasehold property 
improvements

– 2%–10% per annum straight line

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised where 
the carrying amount of an asset or liability in the balance 
sheet differs from its tax base, except for differences 
arising on:

•  the initial recognition of goodwill;

Plant and machinery – 15% per annum reducing balance

Motor vehicles

– 25% per annum reducing balance

E commerce 
infrastructure

– 10% per annum straight line

Other fixed assets

– 15%–33% per annum straight line

98

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

99

1  Accounting policies (continued)

Investments in subsidiary undertakings

Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less 
provision for impairment.

Investments in associates

An associate is an entity over which the Group has 
significant influence and that is neither a subsidiary nor 
an interest in a joint venture. Significant influence is 
the power to participate in the financial and operating 
policy decisions of the investee but is not control or joint 
control over those policies.

The results and assets and liabilities of associates are 
incorporated in the consolidated financial statements 
using the equity method of accounting. Under the equity 
method, investments in associates are carried in the 
consolidated balance sheet at cost as adjusted for 
post-acquisition changes in the Group’s share of the 
net assets of the associate, less any impairment in 
the value of the investment. Losses of an associate in 
excess of the Group’s interest in that associate are not 
recognised. Additional losses are provided for, and a 
liability is recognised, only to the extent that the Group 
has incurred legal or constructive obligations or made 
payments on behalf of the associate.

Any excess of the cost of acquisition over the Group’s 
share of the net fair value of the identifiable assets, 
liabilities and contingent liabilities of the associate 
recognised at the date of acquisition is recognised as 
goodwill. The goodwill is included within the carrying 
amount of the investment.

Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances 
and call deposits with an original maturity of three 
months or less. Bank overdrafts that are repayable on 
demand and form an integral part of the Group’s cash 
management are included as a component of cash and 
cash equivalents for the purpose of the statements of 
cash flows. 

Dividends

Dividends are recognised when they become legally 
payable. In the case of interim dividends to equity 
shareholders, this is when declared by the Directors. In 
the case of final dividends, this is when approved by the 
shareholders at the AGM.

Inventories

Inventories are initially recognised at cost, and 
subsequently at the lower of cost and net realisable 
value. Cost comprises all costs of purchase, costs of 
conversion and other costs incurred in bringing the 
inventories to their present location and condition.

Biological assets

Biological assets comprise two asset types: livestock, 
and fish and fish eggs

Livestock is measured at fair value less costs to sell. 
The fair value of livestock is based on quoted prices of 
livestock and adjusted for age, breed, and genetic merit 
in the principal (or most advantageous) market for the 
livestock, and therefore is categorised within level 2 of 
the fair value hierarchy set out in IFRS 13.

Fish and fish eggs are, in accordance with IAS 41 
‘Agriculture’, measured at fair value, unless the fair value 
cannot be measured reliably. The principal components 
of fish and fish eggs within the business are:

•  Salmon broodstock

•  Salmon fingerlings

•  Salmon eggs

•  Lumpfish eggs and fingerlings

Non-current biological assets are those biological assets 
which will not produce saleable progeny within twelve 
months of the balance sheet date. Further details of the 
valuation of fish and fish eggs are given in note 18.

Government grants

Government grants received on capital expenditure are 
included in the balance sheet as deferred income and 
released to the income statement over the life of the 
asset. Grants for revenue expenditure are netted against 
the cost incurred by the Group. Where retention of a 
government grant is dependent on the Group satisfying 
certain criteria, it is initially recognised as deferred 
income. When the criteria for retention have been 
satisfied, the deferred income balance is released to the 
consolidated income statement or netted against the 
asset purchased. 

Provisions

The Group has recognised provisions for liabilities 
of uncertain timing or amount including those for 
leasehold dilapidations, sale or return obligations and 
legal disputes. The provision is measured at the best 
estimate of the expenditure required to settle the 
obligation at the reporting date, discounted at a pre-tax 
rate reflecting current market assessments of the time 
value of money and risks specific to the liability. In the 
case of leasehold dilapidations, the provision takes into 
account the potential that the properties in question may 
be sublet for some or all of the remaining lease term.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

2  

 Critical accounting estimates  
and judgements 

The Group makes certain estimates and assumptions 
regarding the future. Estimates and judgements are 
continually evaluated based on historical experience 
and other factors, including expectations of future 
events that are believed to be reasonable under the 
circumstances. In the future, actual experience may 
differ from these estimates and assumptions. The 
estimates and assumptions that have a significant 
risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying 
amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial 
year are discussed below.

Estimates and assumptions

(a) Fair value measurement

A number of assets and liabilities included in the Group’s 
financial statements require measurement at, and/or 
disclosure of, fair value. 

The fair value measurement of the Group’s financial 
and non-financial assets and liabilities utilises market 
observable inputs and data as far as possible. 
Inputs used in determining fair value measurements 
are categorised into different levels based on how 
observable the inputs used in the valuation technique 
utilised are (the ‘fair value hierarchy’): 

(c) Legal proceedings

The Group reviews outstanding legal cases following 
developments in the legal proceedings and at each 
reporting date, in order to assess the need for provisions 
and disclosures in its financial statements. Among the 
factors considered in making decisions on provisions 
are the nature of litigation, claim or assessment, the 
legal process and potential level of damages in the 
jurisdiction in which the litigation, claim or assessment 
has been brought, the progress of the case (including 
the progress after the date of the financial statements 
but before those statements are issued), the opinions or 
views of legal advisers, experience on similar cases and 
any decision of the Group’s management as to how it will 
respond to the litigation, claim or assessment.

(d) Valuation of intangible assets

Where the cost of intangible assets acquired as part 
of business combinations is not separately identifiable 
or does not represent the fair value, the valuation is 
calculated based upon value in use which requires the 
use of a discount rate in order to calculate the present 
value of cash flows. These intangibles are reviewed 
annually for impairment. The recoverable amount is 
determined based on value in use calculations. The 
use of this method requires the estimation of future 
cash flows and the choice of a discount rate in order to 
calculate the present value of the cash flows.

Level 1: Quoted prices in active markets for identical 
items (unadjusted) 

(e) Income taxes

Level 2: Observable direct or indirect inputs other than 
Level 1 inputs 

Level 3: Unobservable inputs (i.e. not derived from 
market data). 

The classification of an item into the above levels is 
based on the lowest level of the inputs used that has a 
significant effect on the fair value measurement of the 
item. Transfers of items between levels are recognised 
in the period they occur 

The Group measures a number of items at fair value. 

Financial instruments (note 3)

Biological assets (note 18)

Business combinations (note 32), including contingent 
consideration (note 20).

For more detailed information in relation to the fair value 
measurement of the items above, please refer to the 
applicable notes. 

(b) Impairment of goodwill

The Group is required to test, on an annual basis, 
whether goodwill has suffered any impairment. The 
recoverable amount is determined based on value in 
use calculations. The use of this method requires the 
estimation of future cash flows and the choice of a 
discount rate in order to calculate the present value 
of the cash flows. More information including carrying 
values is included in note 15.

The Group is subject to income tax in several 
jurisdictions and significant judgement is required 
in determining the provision for income taxes. The 
Group believes that its accruals for tax liabilities 
are adequate for all open audit years based on its 
assessment of many factors including past experience 
and interpretations of tax law. This assessment relies on 
estimates and assumptions and may involve a series of 
complex judgements about future events. To the extent 
that the final tax outcome of these matters is different 
than the amounts recorded, such differences will 
impact income tax expense in the period in which such 
determination is made.

(f) Share-based payments

The Group measures the cost of equity-settled 
transactions with employees by reference to the fair 
value of the equity instruments at the date at which 
they are granted. Estimating fair value for share-based 
payment transactions requires determination of the most 
appropriate valuation model, which is dependent on the 
terms and conditions of the grant. This estimate also 
requires determination of the most appropriate inputs 
to the valuation model including the expected life of the 
share option, volatility and dividend yield and making 
assumptions about them. The assumptions and models 
used for estimating fair value for share-based payment 
transactions are disclosed in note 30.

100

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

101

 
 
 
 
 
3  Financial instruments — Risk Management

3  Financial instruments — Risk Management (continued)

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

The Group is exposed through its operations to the following financial risks:

•  Credit risk

•  Fair value or cash flow interest rate risk

•  Foreign exchange risk

•  Liquidity risk

In common with all other businesses, the Group is exposed to risks that arise from its use of financial instruments. This note 
describes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing those risks and the methods used to measure them. 
Further quantitative information in respect of these risks is presented throughout these financial statements. There have 
been no substantive changes in the Group’s exposure to financial instrument risks, its objectives, policies and processes for 
managing those risks or the methods used to measure them from previous periods unless otherwise stated in this note.

Principal financial instruments

The principal financial instruments used by the Group, from which financial instrument risk arises, are as follows:

•  Trade receivables 

•  Cash and cash equivalents

•  Trade and other payables

•  Bank overdrafts

•  Floating-rate bank loans

•  Contingent consideration

The contingent consideration held within other payables is classified as financial liabilities at fair value through profit and 
loss. In accordance with IFRS 13 ‘Fair Value Measurement’, the measurement of the fair value of contingent consideration is 
categorised into Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy, as the inputs are primarily unobservable. The amounts payable for all of the 
outstanding amounts depend on sales volumes or sales revenues targets. Management uses the actual performance against 
these targets together with relevant budgets and forecasts to derive the fair value of the contingent consideration. The amount 
recorded in these financial statements for contingent consideration for all acquisitions with the exception of Akvaforsk Genetic 
Center Inc, represents the maximum amounts payable. An increased level of performance for Akvaforsk Genetic Center Inc 
would increase the amount payable. A reduction in the level of performance would significantly reduce the amounts payable.

A summary of the financial instruments held by category is provided below:

Group

Financial assets

Financial assets not measured at fair value

Cash and cash equivalents (note 34)

Trade and other receivables (note 19)

Total financial assets

Financial liabilities 

Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost

Trade and other payables (note 20)

Loans and borrowings (note 21)

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit and loss

Other payables — contingent consideration (note 20)

Total financial liabilities

2016
£000

38,140 

29,926 

68,066 

2016
£000

26,268 

37,696 

63,964 

10,220 

74,184 

2015
£000

13,564 

10,281 

23,845 

2015
£000

11,066 

156 

11,222 

16,296 

27,518 

Principal financial instruments (continued)

Company

Financial assets

Financial assets not measured at fair value

Cash and cash equivalents (note 34)

Trade and other receivables (note 19)

Total financial assets

Financial liabilities 

Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost

Trade and other payables (note 20)

Loans and borrowings (note 21)

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit and loss

Other payables — contingent consideration (note 20)

Total financial liabilities

2016
£000

27,480 

101,122 

128,602 

2016
£000

25,916 

37,193 

63,109 

82 

63,191 

2015
£000

5,542 

69,977 

75,519 

2015
£000

5,510 

60 

5,570 

3,351 

8,921 

There were no financial instruments classified as available for sale.

General objectives, policies and processes

The Board has overall responsibility for the determination of the Group’s risk management objectives and policies and, 
whilst retaining ultimate responsibility for them, it has delegated the authority for designing and operating processes that 
ensure the effective implementation of the objectives and policies to the Group’s finance function. 

The Board receives monthly reports from the Group Chief Financial Officer through which it reviews the effectiveness of the 
processes put in place and the appropriateness of the objectives and policies it sets. 

The overall objective of the Board is to set policies that seek to reduce risk as far as possible without unduly affecting the 
Group’s competitiveness and flexibility. Further details regarding these policies are set out below:

Credit risk

Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its 
contractual obligations. The Group is mainly exposed to credit risk from credit sales. It is Group policy, implemented locally, 
to assess the credit risk of new customers before entering contracts. 

Credit risk also arises from cash and cash equivalents and deposits with banks and financial institutions. For banks and 
financial institutions, only independently rated parties with minimum rating “A” are accepted.

Further disclosures regarding trade and other receivables are provided in note 19.

Fair value and cash flow interest rate risk

During the year the Group had borrowings denominated in Sterling and US Dollars. If interest rates on Pound Sterling and 
US Dollar denominated borrowings had been 100 basis points higher/lower with all other variables held constant, loss after 
tax for the year ended 30 September 2016 would be £434,000 higher/lower (2015: £nil). The Directors consider that 100 
basis points is the maximum likely change in the relevant interest rates over the next year, being the period up to the next 
point at which the Group expects to make these disclosures.

102

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

103

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3  Financial instruments — Risk Management (continued)

3  Financial instruments — Risk Management (continued)

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Foreign exchange risk

Foreign exchange risk arises when individual Group entities enter into transactions denominated in a currency other than 
their functional currency (principally Sterling, Norwegian Krone, Icelandic Krona, Euro, US dollars and Danish Krone). The 
Group’s policy is, where possible, to allow Group entities to settle liabilities denominated in their functional currency with 
the cash generated from their own operations in that currency. Where Group entities have liabilities denominated in a 
currency other than their functional currency (and have insufficient reserves of that currency to settle them), cash already 
denominated in that currency will, where possible, be transferred from elsewhere within the Group.

The table below shows the impact of a 10 per cent. increase and reduction in Sterling against the relevant foreign 
currencies, with all other variables held constant, on the Group’s profit before tax and equity. A greater or smaller change 
would have a pro-rata effect. The movements in profit arise from retranslation of foreign currency denominated monetary 
items held at the year end, including the foreign currency revolving credit facility, foreign currency bank accounts, trade 
receivables, trade and other payables. The movements in equity arise from the retranslation of the net assets of overseas 
subsidiaries and the intangible assets arising on consolidation in accordance with IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial 
Statements.

£/$

£/€

£/NOK

£/ISK

£/DKK

£/THB

Profit
£’000

Equity
£’000

Profit
£’000

Equity
£’000

Profit
£’000

Equity
£’000

Profit
£’000

Equity
£’000

Profit
£’000

Equity
£’000

Profit
£’000

Equity
£’000

3,214  (20,545)

174 

(554)

359 

(2,659)

412 

(2,518)

(41)

(41)

(3,928)

25,110 

(213)

677 

(439)

3,250 

(504)

3,077 

51 

51 

(98)

(212)

63 

(75)

218 

(2,276)

833 

(1,913)

(132)

(132)

120 

259 

(77)

92 

(266)

2,781 

(1,018)

2,338 

161 

161 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(854)

1,043 

40 

(49)

2016 10% 
increase in rate

2016 10% 
reduction in rate

2015 10% 
increase in rate

2015 10% 
reduction in rate

Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk arises from the Group’s management of working capital and the finance charges and principal repayments on 
its debt instruments. It is the risk that the Group will encounter difficulty in meeting its financial obligations as they fall due.

The Group’s policy is to ensure that it will always have sufficient cash to allow it to meet its liabilities when they become 
due. To achieve this aim, the Group seeks to maintain cash balances (or agreed facilities) sufficient to meet expected 
requirements detailed in rolling three month cashflow forecasts, and in longer term cashflow forecasts.

The following table sets out the contractual maturities (representing undiscounted contractual cash-flows) of financial 
liabilities:

Group

As at September 2016

Trade and other payables

Loans and borrowings

Total

As at September 2015

Trade and other payables

Loans and borrowings

Total

Company

As at September 2016

Trade and other payables

Loans and borrowings

Total

As at September 2015

Up to 
3 months
£000

26,613 

416 

27,029 

Up to 
3 months
£000

9,522 

16 

9,538 

Up to 
3 months
£000

25,916 

326 

26,242 

Up to 
3 months
£000

Between 
3 and 12 
months
£000

1,051 

1,232 

2,283 

Between 
3 and 12 
months
£000

10,510 

50 

10,560 

Between 
3 and 12 
months
£000

82 

966 

1,048 

Between 
3 and 12 
months
£000

Trade and other payables

5,510 

3,000 

Loans and borrowings

- 

- 

Total

5,510 

3,000 

Between 
1 and 2 
years
£000

7,862 

1,438 

9,300 

Between 
1 and 2 
years
£000

3,946 

37 

3,983 

Between 
1 and 2 
years
£000

- 

1,292 

1,292 

Between 
1 and 2 
years
£000

70 

- 

70 

Between 
2 and 5 
years
£000

962 

40,042 

41,004 

Between 
2 and 5 
years
£000

2,608 

 - 

2,608 

Between 
2 and 5 
years
£000

- 

40,042 

40,042 

Between 
2 and 5 
years
£000

281 

- 

281 

Over 
5 years
£000

- 

60 

60 

Over 
5 years
£000

776 

60 

836 

Over 
5 years
£000

- 

60 

60 

Over 
5 years 
£000

- 

60 

60 

Capital Management

The capital structure of the Group consists of debt, as analysed in Note 21, and equity attributable to the equity holders of 
the Parent Company, comprising share capital, share premium, non-controlling interest, retained earnings, and share based 
payment reserve as shown in the Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity. The Group manages its capital with the 
objective that all entities within the Group continue as going concerns while maintaining an efficient structure to minimise 
the cost of capital and ensuring that the Group complies with the banking covenants associated with the external borrowing 
facilities. These covenants are related to interest cover and leverage. The Group is not restricted by any externally imposed 
capital requirements.

104

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

105

 
 
 
4  Revenue

Revenue arises from:

Sale of goods

Provision of services

5  Expenses by nature

Changes in inventories of finished goods and work in progress

Changes in biological assets

Write-down of inventory to net realisable value

Course fees

Raw materials and consumables used

Transportation expenses

Staff costs (see note 7)

Motor, travel and entertainment

Premises costs

Advertising and marketing

Professional fees

Foreign exchange gains

Losses on disposal of property, plant and equipment

Exceptional expenses (see note 10)

Other research and development costs

Other investing activities

Depreciation of PPE

Amortisation of intangible assets

Other costs

2016
£000

94,751

14,624

109,375

2016
£000

1,186 

(928)

686 

2,648 

43,634 

1,137 

26,499 

3,093 

6,516 

1,690 

4,563 

(1,674)

30 

146 

7,702 

12,851 

2,859 

13,749 

3,459 

2015
£000

34,578

9,621

44,199

2015
£000

978 

452 

767 

1,578 

14,734 

841 

15,099 

1,512 

2,553 

1,314 

2,350 

(1,874)

21 

160 

5,389 

4,326 

1,304 

3,064 

1,230 

Total cost of sales, operating costs, depreciation and amortisation

129,846 

55,798 

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

6  Auditor’s remuneration

Audit of these financial statements

Amounts receivable by auditors and their associates in respect of:

  Audit of financial statements of subsidiaries pursuant to legislation

  Audit related assurance services

  Services relating to taxation

  Due diligence

  All other services

2016
£000

64

249

23

3

907

-

1,246

2015
£000

4

140

16

62

82

27

331

The 2016 fees for the services relating to taxation and the due diligence were performed by the company’s previous auditor, 
BDO LLP. The remainder of the fees for 2016 were due to KPMG LLP, who were appointed during the year.

7  Staff costs

Staff costs (including Directors) comprise:

Wages and salaries

Social security contributions and similar taxes

Defined contribution pension cost

Share-based payment expense (note 30)

The average monthly number of employees, including Directors, during 
the year was as follows:

Production

Administration

Management

2016
£000

22,741

1,930

1,079

749

26,499

2016
No.

449

131

123

703

2015
£000

12,994

1,168

479

458

15,099

2015
No.

247

53

91

391

106

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

107

 
 
7  Staff costs (continued)

Directors’ remuneration 

Salary
£000

Bonus
£000

Taxable 
benefits
£000

Long-term 
incentive
£000

Pension
£000

Fees
£000

2016
£000

2015
£000

Roland Bonney 

Mark Plampin

Malcolm Pye 

Basil Brookes

Alex Hambro

Susan Searle

171

163

188

-

-

-

99

93

110

-

-

-

Total

522

302

2

2

3

-

-

-

7

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

16

11

17

-

-

-

-

-

-

35

45

43

288

269

318

35

45

43

207

200

216

35

45

35

44

123

998

738

Of the 2015 total of £738,000, £705,000 was emoluments and £33,000 related to pension and other post-employment 
benefit costs. 

During the year retirement benefits were accruing to 3 Directors (2015: 3) in respect of defined contribution pension 
schemes. The cost of employer National Insurance contributions in relation to the Directors was £146,000 (2015: 
£105,000).

The value of the Group’s contributions paid to a defined contribution pension scheme in respect of the highest paid Director 
amounted to £17,000 (2015: £13,000).

In addition to the above, there was an accounting charge for share based payments in respect of the Directors for £35,000 
(2015: £59,000). The aggregate gain on the exercise of options by the Directors during the year was £nil (2015: £nil).

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

8  Segment information (continued) 

In addition to the above, reported together as “all other segments” are the following divisions, the results of which are not 
significant on an individual basis:

•  Sustainability Science Division — provides sustainable food production consultancy, technical consultancy and assurance 

services;

•  Technical Publishing Division — promotes sustainable food production and ethics through online news and technical 

publications for the international agriculture and food processing sectors and through delivery of training courses to the 
industries.

Measurement of operating segment profit or loss

The Group separates its operations into Trading Activities and Investing Activities to report segmental performance. These 
measures are used by management for planning and reporting purposes. These measures are not defined in International 
Financial Reporting Standards and may not be comparable with similarly described measures used by other companies. 
Trading and Investing Activities are described further in note 26.

Inter-segment sales are priced along the same lines as sales to external customers, with an appropriate discount 
being applied to encourage use of Group resources at a rate acceptable to local tax authorities. This policy was applied 
consistently throughout the current and prior period.

Year ended 30 September 2016

Animal 
Health 
£000

Breeding 
and 
Genetics 
£000

Advanced 
Animal 
Nutrition 
£000

All other 
segments 
£000

Corporate 
£000

Inter-
segment 
sales 
£000

Total 
£000

Notes 

Revenue

Cost of sales

24,837 

20,717 

55,024 

11,195 

3,002 

(5,400)

109,375 

(15,035)

(13,523)

(26,517)

(6,985)

(938)

4,436 

(58,562)

Directors’ interests under the Company’s employee share plans

Gross profit/(loss)

9,802 

7,194 

28,507 

4,210 

2,064 

(964)

50,813 

Share 
option 
scheme

EMI 
scheme

Options 
held at 30 
September 
2015

135,000

Director

Mark Plampin

Mark Plampin

CSOP II

67,647

Options 
exercised in 
year

Options 
granted in 
year

Options 
held at 30 
September 
2016

Exercise 
price

Grant date

Date from 
which 
exercisable

-

-

-

-

135,000

0.1p

67,647

0.1p

29 August 
2013

29 August 
2016

9 March 
2015

8 March 
2018

Further details of Directors’ remuneration are provided in the Remuneration Report on pages 74 to 78.

The key management of the Group is deemed to be the Board of Directors who have authority and responsibility for planning 
and controlling all significant activities of the Group.

8  Segment information

Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the reports made to the chief operating decision maker. It is 
considered that the role of chief operating decision maker is performed by the Board of Directors.

The Group operates globally and for management purposes is organised into reportable segments as follows:

•  Animal Health Division — provides veterinary services, environmental services diagnostics and animal health products to 

global aquaculture, and manufactures licenced veterinary vaccines and vaccine components;

•  Breeding and Genetics Division — harnesses industry leading salmon breeding technologies combined with state-of-the-

art production facilities to provide a range of year-round high genetic merit ova;

•  Advanced Animal Nutrition — manufactures and provides technically advanced nutrition and health products to the global 

aquaculture industry;

•  Corporate — the corporate segment represents revenues earned from recharging certain central costs to the operating 

divisions, together with unallocated central costs.

Operating costs relating to 
Trading Activities

EBITDA from Trading 
Activities

Investing Activities:

R&D expenditure

Pre-operational expenses

Adjusted EBITDA

Acquisition-related 
(expenses)/income

(5,352)

(3,553)

(11,382)

(4,049)

(4,317)

151 

(28,502)

4,450 

3,641 

17,125 

161 

(2,253)

(813)

22,311 

26

26

(8,258)

(2,195)

(1,341)

- 

(414)

(61)

80 

(1,550)

- 

- 

74 

(11,720)

582 

(1,363)

(4,222)

1,385 

15,864 

(1,389)

(2,253)

(157)

9,228 

Exceptional items

10,26

- 

- 

26

(257)

(2,387)

2 

- 

- 

(10,317)

14 

(12,945)

(146)

- 

- 

(146)

EBITDA

Depreciation

Amortisation

(4,479)

(1,002)

15,866 

(1,535)

(12,570)

(143)

(3,863)

(721)

(796)

(1,016)

(792)

(1,850)

(10,369)

(271)

(738)

(55)

- 

- 

- 

(2,859)

(13,749)

Operating profit/(loss)

(5,992)

(3,648)

4,481 

(2,544)

(12,625)

(143)

(20,471)

Finance costs

Finance income

Share of profit of equity-
accounted investees, net 
of tax

Group loss before tax

(6,170)

3,984 

273 

(22,384)

108

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

109

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
8  Segment information (continued) 

Year ended 30 September 2015 

Animal 
Health 
£000

Breeding 
and 
Genetics 
£000

Advanced 
Animal 
Nutrition 
£000

All other 
segments 
£000

Corporate 
£000

Inter-
segment 
sales 
£000

Total 
£000

Notes

Revenue

Cost of sales

21,098 

15,871 

(14,524)

(9,912)

Gross profit /(loss)

6,574 

5,959 

Operating costs relating  
to Trading Activities

EBITDA from Trading 
Activities

Investing Activities:

R&D expenditure

Pre-operational expenses

Adjusted EBITDA

Acquisition-related 
(expenses)/income

(4,445)

(1,339)

2,129 

4,620 

26

26

(5,199)

(1,396)

(887)

- 

(3,957)

3,224 

26

(65)

1,163 

Exceptional items

10,26

- 

(1)

EBITDA

Depreciation

Amortisation

(4,022)

4,386 

(653)

(1,251)

(406)

(928)

Operating profit/(loss)

(5,926)

3,052 

Finance costs

Finance income

Group loss before tax

External revenue by location of customers

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

United Kingdon

Chile

India

Vietnam

Norway

Rest of Europe

Other

No customers accounted for greater than 10% of total turnover in the year.

10,101 

2,271 

(5,142)

44,199 

(6,906)

(1,463)

4,703 

(28,102)

3,195 

808 

(439)

16,097 

(3,405)

(4,924)

439 

(13,674)

(210)

(4,116)

- 

- 

(649)

(29)

(859)

(4,145)

(18)

(2,414)

509 

(668)

(368)

(7,227)

(192)

(885)

(53)

- 

(1,445)

(7,280)

2016
£000

13,610 

3,043 

9,584 

7,258 

18,697 

18,772 

38,411 

109,375 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

2,423 

(6,595)

(1,565)

(5,737)

(1,334)

(160)

(7,231)

(1,304)

(3,064)

(11,599)

(34)

274 

(11,359)

2015
£000

13,740 

6,411 

- 

- 

12,629 

8,792 

2,627 

44,199 

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

8  Segment information (continued) 

Non-current assets by location of assets

Belgium

UK

Rest of Europe

Rest of world

9  Net finance costs/(income)

Interest received on bank deposits

Foreign exchange gains on financing activities

Finance income

Finance leases (interest portion)

Foreign exchange losses on financing activities

Interest expense on financial liabilities measured at amortised cost

Finance costs

Net finance (costs)/income recognised in profit or loss

2016
£000

276,327

39,717

80,336

12,036

408,416

2016
£000

254

3,730

3,984

(16)

(4,978)

(1,176)

(6,170)

(2,186)

2015
£000

2,288

28,978

59,217

4,362

94,845

2015
£000

274

-

274

(3)

-

(31)

(34)

240

The foreign exchange gains of £3,730,000 were made on a foreign currency hedging instrument entered into to fix the 
exchange rate for the US Dollar consideration paid on the acquisition of INVE Aquaculture B.V.

10  Exceptional items

Items that are material because of their size or nature, non-recurring and whose significance is sufficient to warrant 
separate disclosure and identification within the consolidated financial statements are referred to as exceptional items.  
The separate reporting of exceptional items helps to provide an understanding of the Group’s underlying performance. 

Exceptional IPO costs

Exceptional restructuring costs

Total exceptional costs

2016
£000

-

146

146

2015
£000

24

136

160

Restructuring costs of £146,000 (2015: £136,000) were incurred on re-organisations within the Sustainability Science 
Division during the year. On 18 December 2013 Benchmark Holdings plc was admitted to trading on AIM with significant 
non-recurring costs being incurred as a result. £24,000 of these costs fell due in 2015.

110

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

111

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
11  Taxation 

Amounts recognised in profit or loss

Current tax expense

Analysis of charge in period

Current tax:

Current income tax expense on profits for the period

Adjustment in respect of prior periods

Total current tax

Deferred tax expense

Origination and reversal of temporary differences

Deferred tax movements in respect of prior periods

Total deferred tax credit (Note 23)

Total tax (credit)/charge

2016
£000

2015
£000

1,252 

(1,250)

2 

(4,048)

8

(4,040)

(4,038)

877 

(23)

854 

(284)

(174)

(458)

396 

The reasons for the difference between the actual tax (credit)/charge for the year and the standard rate of corporation tax in 
the United Kingdom applied to profits for the year are as follows:

Accounting loss before income tax

Expected tax credit based on the standard rate of UK corporation tax 
at the domestic rate of 20% (2015: 20%)

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes

Research and development relief

Deferred tax not recognised

Adjustment to tax charge in respect of prior periods

Profits of associate reported net of tax

Effects of changes in tax rates

Different tax rates in overseas jurisdictions

Total tax (credit)/charge

2016
£000

2015
£000

(22,384)

(11,359)

(4,477)

2,982 

(54)

2,592 

(1,242)

(54)

(475)

(3,310)

(4,038)

(2,272)

532 

(230)

2,463 

(197)

- 

- 

100 

396 

Changes in tax rates and factors affecting the future tax charge

Reductions in the UK corporation tax rate were substantively enacted in the year. The main rate of corporation tax was 
reduced from 20 per cent to 19 per cent effective from 1 April 2017 and to 17 per cent from 1 April 2020. Deferred tax is 
calculated at the substantively enacted rates, at which the temporary differences and tax losses are expected to reverse, in 
the territories in which they arose.

The adjustment in respect of prior periods includes £1,037,000 in relation to Research and Development tax credits from 
2014 and 2015 received during the year.

There was no deferred tax recognised in other comprehensive income.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

12  Earnings/loss per share

Basic earnings/loss per share is calculated by dividing the profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity holders of the 
Company by the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the period.

Loss attributable to equity holders of the parent (£000)

Weighted average number of shares in issue (thousands)

Basic loss per share (pence)

2016

(18,337)

417,952 

(4.39)

2015

(11,988)

201,280 

(5.96)

Diluted loss /earnings per share is calculated by adjusting the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding 
to assume conversion of all dilutive potential ordinary shares. This is done by calculating the number of shares that could 
have been acquired at fair value (determined as the average market price of the Company’s shares since admission to AIM) 
based on the monetary value of the subscription rights attached to outstanding share options and warrants.

Therefore, the Company is required to adjust the earnings/loss per share calculation in relation to the share options that 
are in issue under the Company’s share based incentive schemes as follows:

Loss attributable to equity holders of the parent (£000)

Weighted average number of shares in issue (thousands)

Diluted loss per share (pence)

2016

(18,337)

417,952 

(4.39)

2015

(11,988)

201,280 

(5.96)

A total of 5,891,889 potential ordinary shares have not been included within the calculation of statutory diluted earnings/
loss per share for the year (2015: 2,401,186) as they are anti-dilutive. However, these potential ordinary shares could 
dilute earnings/loss per share in the future.

Earnings /loss per share from Trading Activities

Net profit/loss attributable to equity shareholders has been adjusted to exclude exceptional items and other operating 
costs relating to Investing Activities as disclosed in note 26.

Profit /(Loss) from Trading Activities attributable to equity holders of 
the parent (£000)

Weighted average number of shares in issue (thousands)

Earning/(Loss) per share from Trading Activities (pence)

Diluted earnings/loss per share from Trading Activities were as follows:

Profit /(Loss) from Trading Activities attributable to equity holders of 
the parent (£000)

Weighted average number of shares in issue (thousands)

Diluted earnings/(loss) per share from Trading Activities (pence)

2016

2015

7,481 

417,952 

1.79 

(2,273)

201,280 

(1.13)

2016

2015

7,481 

419,600 

1.78 

(2,273)

201,280 

(1.13)

112

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

113

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
13  Property, plant and equipment 

Freehold 
Land 
and 
Buildings 
£000

Assets in the 
course of 
construction 
£000

Long Term 
Leasehold 
Property 
Improvements 
£000

Plant and 
Machinery 
£000

E commerce 
Infra-structure 
£000

Office 
Equipment
and Fixtures 
£000

Group

Cost

Balance at 1 October 2014

Additions

On acquisition

Reclassification

Exchange differences

Disposals

728 

264 

4,638 

- 

- 

- 

142 

2,615 

10,950 

- 

- 

- 

- 

14 

77 

114 

(39)

(60)

Balance at 30 September 2015

5,630 

11,092 

2,721 

Balance at 1 October 2015

Additions

On acquisition

Reclassification

Fair value adjustment

Exchange differences

Disposals

5,630 

1,268 

3,017 

518 

- 

2,015 

- 

11,092 

11,785 

555 

2,721 

487 

- 

(1,718)

1,480 

- 

93 

- 

(75)

267 

(33)

4,540 

1,628 

1,530 

39 

31 

(211)

7,557 

7,557 

4,803 

2,204 

34 

- 

1,325 

(411)

204 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

204 

204 

- 

- 

43 

- 

- 

- 

Balance at 30 September 2016

12,448 

21,807 

4,847 

15,512 

247 

Total 
£000

9,134 

13,034 

6,316 

- 

(18)

(272)

28,194 

28,194 

18,660 

6,089 

(2)

(75)

3,802 

(671)

55,997 

905 

178 

71 

(153)

(10)

(1)

990 

990 

317 

313 

(359)

- 

102 

(227)

1,136 

Accumulated Depreciation

Balance at 1 October 2014

Depreciation charge for the 
year

Exchange differences

Disposals

- 

175 

- 

- 

Balance at 30 September 2015

175 

Balance at 1 October 2015

Depreciation charge for the 
year

Reclassification

Exchange differences

Disposals

Balance at 30 September 2016

175 

638 

- 

143 

- 

956 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Net book value

At 30 September 2016

At 30 September 2015

At 1 October 2014

11,492 

5,455 

728 

21,807 

11,092 

142 

3,931 

2,270 

2,381 

11,911 

5,777 

3,389 

234 

1,151 

253 

- 

(36)

451 

736 

(40)

(67)

1,780 

145 

33 

- 

- 

178 

362 

1,892 

107 

- 

- 

469 

1,304 

(40)

(103)

3,053 

451 

1,780 

178 

469 

3,053 

358 

1,638 

79 

28 

- 

916 

162 

321 

(300)

3,601 

21 

42 

1 

- 

242 

5 

26 

59 

204 

(283)

36 

(167)

259 

877 

521 

543 

2,859 

- 

529 

(467)

5,974 

50,023 

25,141 

7,242 

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

13  Property, plant and equipment (continued)

Security over the assets is disclosed within note 21.

The above includes the following in respect of plant and machinery held under finance leases (note 27):

Cost

Accumulated depreciation

Net book value

Company

Cost

Balance at 1 October 2014

Additions

Disposals

Balance at 1 October 2015

Additions

Balance at 30 September 2016

Accumulated depreciation

Balance at 1 October 2014

Depreciation charge for the year

Disposals

Balance at 1 October 2015

Depreciation charge for the year

Balance at 30 September 2016

Net book value

At 30 September 2016

At 30 September 2015

At 1 October 2014

2016
£000

824

(266)

558

2015
£000

259

(63)

196

Office equipment
and fixtures
£000

147

115

(44)

218

148

366

82

22

(40)

64

62

126

240

154

65

114

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

115

 
14  Intangible assets

15  Impairment testing of goodwill 

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Websites 
£000

Goodwill 
£000

Patents and 
Trademarks 
£000

Intellectual 
Property 
£000

Customer 
Lists 
£000

Contracts 
£000 

Licences 
£000

Genetics 
£000

Development 
costs 
£000

Total 
£000

Cost or valuation 

Balance at 1 October 2014 

517 

2,701 

590 

1,678 

- 

1,835 

3,190 

- 

Additions — on acquisition 

Additions — externally acquired 

Exchange differences 

- 

- 

- 

27,931 

- 

3,074 

1,327 

7,223 

2,675 

22,121 

- 

119 

- 

(930)

- 

(15)

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(534)

(41)

(1,865)

Balance at 30 September 2015 

517 

29,702 

709 

4,737 

1,327 

8,524 

5,824 

20,256 

Balance at 1 October 2015 

517 

29,702 

709 

4,737 

1,327 

8,524 

5,824 

20,256 

Additions — on acquisition 

-  103,137 

208 

117,019 

4,789 

Additions — externally acquired 

44 

Additions — internally 
developed 

Disposals 

Exchange differences 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(345)

30 

- 

- 

9 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

25,562 

601 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

20,690 

128 

16,625 

667 

1,124 

4,192 

5,332 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

10,511 

64,351 

119 

(3,385)

71,596 

- 

71,596 

-  251,316 

- 

83 

1,440 

1,440 

- 

- 

(345)

48,758 

Balance at 30 September 2016 

561  153,184 

1,075 

138,390 

6,783 

9,648 

35,578 

26,189 

1,440  372,848 

Accumulated amortisation and 
impairment 

Balance at 1 October 2014 

459 

273 

388 

- 

- 

1,087 

483 

- 

Amortisation charge for the 
year 

Impairment 

Exchange differences 

56 

- 

- 

- 

345 

- 

61 

261 

133 

1,369 

454 

385 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(25)

- 

- 

- 

(5)

Balance at 30 September 2015 

515 

618 

449 

261 

133 

2,431 

937 

380 

Balance at 1 October 2015 

515 

618 

449 

261 

133 

2,431 

937 

380 

Amortisation charge for the 
year 

Disposals 

Exchange differences 

3 

- 

- 

- 

(345)

6 

84 

- 

74 

9,488 

349 

1,452 

1,797 

576 

- 

541 

- 

9 

- 

- 

- 

240 

124 

188 

Balance at 30 September 2016 

518 

279 

607 

10,290 

491 

4,123 

2,858 

1,144 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

2,690 

2,719 

345 

(30)

5,724 

5,724 

13,749 

(345)

1,182 

20,310 

Net book value 

At 30 September 2016 

43  152,905 

468 

128,100 

6,292 

5,525 

32,720 

25,045 

1,440  352,538 

At 30 September 2015 

2 

29,084 

At 1 October 2014 

58 

2,428 

260 

202 

4,476 

1,194 

6,093 

4,887 

19,876 

1,678 

- 

748 

2,707 

- 

- 

- 

65,872 

7,821 

Additions relating to business combinations in the year are detailed in note 31. 

Goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated, at acquisition, to the cash generating units (CGUs) that are 
expected to benefit from the business combination. The Group tests goodwill annually for impairment, or more frequently if 
there are indications that goodwill might be impaired.

Goodwill arises across all of the Group’s operating segments, and is allocated specifically against the following CGUs:

FVG Limited
Benchmark Vaccines Limited
Atlantic Veterinary Services 
Limited
FAI do Brasil Criacao  
Animal Ltda
FAI Aquaculture Limited
5M Enterprises Limited
Salmobreed AS
Stofnfiskur HF
Akvaforsk Genetic Center*
Improve International Limited
INVE Aquaculture Group

Animal 
Health
2016
£000

Sustainability 
Science
2016
£000

Breeding and 
Genetics
2016
£000

Technical 
Publishing
2016
£000

288
439

167

-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
894

-
-

-

96
446
-
-
-
-
-
-
542

-
-

-

-
-
-
7,590
13,512
9,334
-
-
30,436

-
-

-

-
-
774
-
-
-
2,995
-
3,769

Advanced 
Animal 
Nutrition
2016
£000

-
-

-

-
-
-
-
-
-
-
117,264
117,264

*Includes goodwill arising from the joint acquisition of Akvaforsk Genetics Center AS and Akvaforsk Genetics Center Inc.

FVG Limited
Benchmark Vaccines Limited
Atlantic Veterinary Services 
Limited
FAI do Brasil Criacao Animal 
Ltda
FAI Aquaculture Limited
5M Enterprises Limited
Salmobreed AS
Stofnfiskur HF
Akvaforsk Genetic Center*
Improve International Limited

Animal 
Health
2015
£000

Sustainability 
Science 
2015
£000

Breeding and 
Genetics
2015
£000

Technical 
Publishing
2015
£000

Advanced 
Animal 
Nutrition
2015
£000

288
439

167

-
-
-
-
-
-
-
894

-
-

-

96
446
-
-
-
-
-
542

-
-

-

-
-
-
6,125
10,405
7,349
-
23,879

-
-

-

-
-
774
-
-
-
2,995
3,769

-
-

-

-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-

Total
2016
£000

288
439

167

96
446
774
7,590
13,512
9,334
2,995
117,264
152,905

Total
2015
£000

288
439

167

96
446
774
6,125
10,405
7,349
2,995
29,084

*Includes goodwill arising from the joint acquisition of Akvaforsk Genetics Center AS and Akvaforsk Genetics Center Inc.

The recoverable amounts of the above CGUs have been determined from value in use calculations which have been 
predicated on discounted cash flow projections from formally approved budgets. These budgets cover a four-year period 
to 30 September 2020 and were then extrapolated into perpetuity taking account of specific growth rates for future cash 
flows, using individual business operating margins based on past experience and future expectations in light of anticipated 
economic and market conditions.

The pre-tax cashflows that these projections produced were discounted at pre-tax discount rates based on the Group’s beta 
adjusted cost of capital reflecting management’s assessment of specific risks related to each cash generating unit. Pre-tax 
discount rates of between 10% and 14% have been used in the impairment calculations which the Directors believe fairly 
reflect the risks inherent in each of the CGUs, and a 2.5% growth rate was used in extrapolating the budgets into perpetuity.

The value in use assessment is sensitive to changes in the key assumptions used, most notably the discount rate and the 
growth rates. Sensitivity analysis has been performed on the individual CGUs, and based on this analysis, no reasonably 
possible changes to these assumptions resulted in an additional impairment charge being required.

116

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

117

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
16  Subsidiary undertakings

16  Subsidiary undertakings (continued)

The direct and indirect subsidiary undertakings of Benchmark Holdings plc, all of which have been included in these 
consolidated financial statements, are as follows:

Name

Name

Animal Health Division

Benchmark Animal Health Group Limited

Benchmark Animal Health Limited

Benchmark Vaccines Limited

FVG Limited

Fish Vet Group Limited (dormant)

Fish Vet Group Asia Limited

Fish Vet Group Norge AS

FVG Inc

Atlantic Veterinary Services Limited

Fish Vet Group SPA

FVG Canada Inc

Sustainability Science Division

FAI Farms Limited

Country of 
incorporation

United Kingdom

United Kingdom

United Kingdom

United Kingdom

United Kingdom

Thailand

Norway

USA

Ireland

Chile

Canada

United Kingdom

FAI do Brasil Criacao Animal Ltda

Brazil

FAI Aquaculture Limited 

RL Consulting Limited 

Trie Benchmark Limited

Allan Environmental Limited

Dust Collective Limited

Dust Collective LLC

Viking Fish Farms Limited (dormant)

Woodland Limited (dormant)

Technical Publishing Division

5M Enterprises Limited

5M Enterprises Inc

Curriculo Limited (dormant)

OOO 5M Enterprises**

Improve International Limited

Continuous Medical Training LDA

Improve International GmbH

Improve International Australia Pty

Improve Formacion Veterinaria

Improve France SARL

Improve Mediterranean Limited (dormant)

Ascomber Limited (dormant)

AquacultureUK Limited (dormant)

European School of Veterinary Post-Graduate 
Studies**

Breeding and Genetics Division

Benchmark Genetics Limited

Salmobreed AS

Stofnfiskur HF

Akvaforsk Genetic Center AS

Akvaforsk Genetics Center Inc*

Akvaforsk Genetic Center Spring Mexico, SA de 
CV (dormant)*

Akvaforsk Do Brasil Cultivo De Especies 
Aquaticas LTDA*

Genetilapia, SA de CV*

United Kingdom

United Kingdom

United Kingdom

United Kingdom

United Kingdom

USA

United Kingdom

United Kingdom

United Kingdom

USA

United Kingdom

Russia

United Kingdom

Portugal

Germany

Australia

Spain

France

United Kingdom

United Kingdom

United Kingdom

United Kingdom

United Kingdom

Norway

Iceland

Norway

USA

Mexico

Brazil

Mexico

Proportion of ownership 
interest as at 30 September

2016

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

99.25%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

98.50%

98.50%

98.50%

0%

100%

100%

100%

70%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

0%

100%

100%

89.45%

100%

80%

80%

80%

41%

2015

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

99.25%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

98.50%

98.50%

98.50%

0%

100%

100%

100%

70%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

0%

100%

100%

89.45%

100%

80%

80%

80%

41%

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Breeding and Genetics Division (continued)

Stofnfiskur Chile Limitada (dormant)

Stofngen EHF (dormant)

Sudourlax EHF (dormant)

Salmobreed Salten AS***

Spring Genetics SRL

Genetica Spring SAS

Animal Advanced Nutrition Division

TomAlgae C.V.B.A.

Inve Aquaculture Holding BV

Inve Aquaculture Temp Holding BV

Inve Asia Ltd

Inve Latin America BV

Inve Aquaculture Europe Holding BV

Inve Technologies NV

Inve Asia Services Ltd

Inve (Thailand) Ltd

PT. Inve Indonesia

Inve Eurasia SA

Inve Hellas SA

Country of 
incorporation

Chile

Iceland

Iceland

Norway

Costa Rica

Colombia

Belgium

Netherlands

Netherlands

Hong Kong

Netherlands

Netherlands

Belgium

Thailand

Thailand

Indonesia

Turkey

Greece

Fortune Ocean Technologies Ltd (dormant)

Hong Kong

Tianjin Inve Aquculture Co Ltd

Inve Vietnam Ltd

Inve Animal Health SA

Fortune Ocean Americas LLC

Inve Aquaculture Mexico SA de CV

Inve do Brasil Ltda

Invecuador SA

Inveservicios SA de CV

Inve Aquaculture NV

Maricoltura di Rosignan Solvay Srl

Inve USA Holdings Inc

Sanders Brine Shrimp Company LC

Golden West Artemia Inc

Inland Sea Inc

United Aquaculture Technologies LLC

Inve Aquaculture Inc

Salt Creek Holdings Inc

Salt Creek Inc

China

Vietnam

Spain

USA

Mexico

Brazil

Ecuador

Mexico

Belgium

Italy

USA

USA

USA

USA

USA

USA

USA

USA

Proportion of ownership 
interest as at 30 September

2016

2015

89.45%

62.62%

89.45%

50%

80%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

89.45%

62.62%

89.45%

50%

-

-

100%

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

* 

** 

 A put and call option agreement is in place to acquire the remaining 20% of Akvaforsk Genetic Center Inc, so the Group controls 100% of that 
company and its wholly owned subsidiaries despite having an 80% equity holding.

 European School of Veterinary Post-Graduate Studies is a company limited by guarantee and although the Group has no equity holding in the 
company, its results are consolidated into this annual report by virtue of control exercised under the provisions of IFRS 10 — Consolidated 
Financial Statements. The same is true of 0005M Enterprises, a limited company incorporated in Russia.

***   Whilst Salmobreed Salten AS was 50% owned by SalmoBreed AS at 30 September 2016, the shareholders’ agreement stipulates that 

SalmoBreed AS will become the majority shareholder over the course of the following twelve months. For this reason SalmoBreed Salten AS has 
been consolidated as a subsidiary undertaking rather than as a joint venture.

118

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

119

 
 
 
16  Subsidiary undertakings (continued)

Cost or valuation

Balance at 1st October 2014

Additions

Capitalisation of intercompany balances

Balance at 30 September 2015

Additions

Capitalisation of intercompany balances

Balance at 30 September 2016

Provisions

Balance at 1st October 2014

Provision against investment in subsidiary company

Balance at 30 September 2015 and at 30 September 2016

Net book value

At 30 September 2016

At 30 September 2015

At 1 October 2014

Investments in 
subsidiary
companies
£000

5,610

23,727

1,015

30,352

231,267

1,133

262,752

-

(850)

(850)

261,902

29,502

5,610

In 2016, the Company acquired 100% of the share capital of INVE Aquaculture Holding B.V. for total consideration of 
£230,667,000, full details of which have been outlined in note 31.

During the year, intercompany balances totalling £1,133,000 were converted into share capital (2015: £1,015,000). 
Additionally, £600,000 (2015: £330,000) of the charge associated with share options relates to employees of subsidiary 
companies, and so this amount has been treated as an investment in the books of the Company.

In 2015, the Company acquired 100% of the share capital of TomAlgae C.V.BA for total consideration of £642,000 
and 100% of the share capital of Improve International Limited and its subsidiaries for a maximum consideration of 
£6,531,000. Subsequent to the acquisition of TomAlgae C.V.B.A., the Group invested a further £1,224,000 to provide long 
term funding to the business, and this was converted to share capital.

In 2015, the Company made a £15,000,000 investment in Benchmark Genetics Limited in order to fund the purchase of 
Stofnfiskur HF and Salmobreed AS. 

In 2015, as part of the restructuring of the Sustainability Science Division, a review of the carrying value of its investments 
in subsidiaries was conducted and the Company made a provision of £850,000.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

17  Inventories

Group

Raw materials

Work in progress

Finished goods and goods for resale

Total inventories at the lower of cost and net realisable value

2016
£000

6,510

10,039

6,682

23,231

2015
£000

1,772

1,655

1,932

5,359

During 2016, £44,320,000 (2015: £15,501,000) was recognised as an expense for inventories carried at net realisable 
value. This is recognised in cost of sales. The cost of inventories recognised as an expense includes £686,000 (2015: 
£767,000) in respect of write-downs of inventory to net realisable value. 

The Company did not have any inventories at the year end (2015: £nil).

18  Biological assets 

Group

Organic sheep

Organic beef

Organic pigs

Organic hens

Broodstock, eggs and fingerlings

Total biological assets

Less: non current broodstock

Total current biological assets

Livestock

2016
£000

262 

244 

- 

23 

11,330 

11,859 

(5,028)

6,831 

2015
£000

223 

202 

2 

- 

7,913 

8,340 

(3,392)

4,948 

The Group operates a commercial and research farming and technology transfer business, and at 30 September 2016 held 
3,269 (2015: 2,992) head of sheep, 447 (2015: 246) head of cattle, nil (2015: 27) pigs and 6,940 (2015: nil) hens. The 
Group had farming sales of £358,000 in the year ended 30 September 2016 (2015: £310,000).

The Group is exposed to financial risks arising from changes in the market value of farm animals. The Group does not 
anticipate that prices will decline significantly in the foreseeable future and, therefore, has not entered into derivative or 
other contracts to manage the risk of a decline in livestock price. The Group reviews its outlook for livestock prices regularly 
in considering the need for active financial risk management.

120

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

121

 
 
 
 
7,584 

2,364 

295 

1,027 

60 

11,330 

Trade receivables — net

18  Biological assets (continued)

Broodstock, eggs and fingerlings

Salmon 
Broodstock
£000

Salmon eggs
£000

Salmon 
fingerlings
£000

Lumpfish 
eggs and 
fingerlings
£000

Tilapia
£000

Total
£000

Biological assets 1 October 2015

5,636 

1,485 

350 

369 

73 

7,913 

Increase due to production/ 
purchase

3,832 

303 

763 

Due to physical changes

(2,879)

15,136 

(221)

Foreign exchange movements

1,685 

444 

29 

Reduction due to sales/ 
discarding of stock

- 

(15,001)

(626)

Fair value adjustments

(690)

(3)

- 

483 

- 

110 

(577)

642 

203 

5,584 

- 

- 

12,036 

2,268 

(225)

(16,429)

9 

(42)

Biological assets 30 September 
2016

Broodstock, eggs and fingerlings 
— non current

Broodstock, eggs and fingerlings 
— current

5,028 

- 

- 

- 

- 

5,028 

2,556 

7,584 

2,364 

2,364 

295 

295 

1,027 

1,027 

60 

60 

6,302 

11,330 

Assumptions used for determining fair value of broodstock, eggs and fingerlings

IAS41 requires that biological assets are accounted for at the estimated fair value net of selling and harvesting costs. Fair 
value is measured in accordance with IFRS13 and is categorised into level 3 in the fair value hierarchy as the inputs include 
unobservable inputs in the valuation of broodstock, eggs and fingerlings for which there are no published market data 
available.

The calculation of the estimated fair value of salmon broodstock is primarily based upon its main harvest output being 
salmon eggs, which are priced upon our current seasonally adjusted selling prices for salmon eggs. These prices are 
reduced for harvesting costs, freight costs, incubation costs and market capacity to arrive at the net value of broodstock. 
The valuation also reflects the internally generated data to arrive at the biomass. This includes the weight of the 
broodstock, the yield that each kilogram of fish will produce and mortality rates. The fish take approximately four years to 
reach maturity, and so the fair value of the age and biomass of the fish is reflected in a discount to the gross biomass to 
reflect the progress to maturity.

The calculation of the fair value of the salmon eggs is based upon the current seasonally adjusted selling prices for salmon 
eggs less transport and incubation costs, and taking account of the market capacity. The valuation also takes account of 
the mortality rates of the eggs and expected life as sourced from internally generated data.

The calculation of the fair value of the salmon and lumpfish fingerlings is valued on current selling prices less transport 
costs. Internally generated data is used to incorporate mortality rates and the weight of the fish.

The lumpfish eggs are valued at cost. Internally generated data is used to calculate mortality rates.

The valuation models by their nature are based upon uncertain assumptions on sales prices, market capacity, weight, 
mortality rates, yields and assessment of the discounts to reflect the stages of maturity. The Group has a degree of 
expertise in these assumptions but these assumptions are subject to change. Relatively small changes in assumptions 
would have a significant impact on the valuation. A 1% increase/decrease in assumed selling price would increase/
decrease the fair value of biological assets by £119,000.

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

18  Biological assets (continued)

Total quantities held at 30 September were:

Salmon broodstock and fingerlings

Lumpfish fingerlings

Salmon eggs

The Company did not hold any biological assets at the year end (2015: £nil). 

19  Trade and other receivables 

Group

Trade receivables

Less: provision for impairment of trade receivables

Total financial assets other than cash and cash
equivalents classified as loans and receivables

Prepayments

Other receivables

Total trade and other receivables

Less: non-current portion: prepayments

Current portion

2016

557 tonnes

1.5m units

2015

452 tonnes

1.4m units

23.6m units

16.5m units

2016
£000

32,133

(2,130)

30,003

30,003

1,672

2,613

34,288

-

34,288

2015
£000

10,560

(279)

10,281

10,281

2,873

2,492

15,646

(293)

15,353

All non-current receivables are due within five years from the end of the reporting period.

The fair values of trade and other receivables classified as loans and receivables are not materially different to their 
carrying values. As at 30 September 2016 trade receivables of £6,979,000 (2015: £3,340,000) were past due but not 
impaired. They relate to customers with no default history. The ageing analysis of these receivables is as follows:

Up to 3 months overdue

3 to 6 months overdue

6 to 12 months overdue

Movements on the Group provision for impairment of trade receivables are as follows:

At 1 October

Assumed in a business combination 

Provided during the year

Receivable written off during the year as uncollectable

At 30 September

2016
£000

5,253

1,139

587

6,979

2016
£000

279

1,831

291

(271)

2,130

2015
£000

1,827

606

907

3,340

2015
£000

63

-

247

(31)

279

The movement on the provision for impaired receivables has been included in the administrative expenses line in the 
consolidated income statement. 

Other classes of financial assets included within trade and other receivables do not contain impaired assets.

122

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

123

 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

19  Trade and other receivables (continued) 

20  Trade and other payables (continued)

Company

Receivables from related parties

Loan provided to subsidiary company

Total financial assets other than cash and cash
equivalents classified as loans and receivables

Prepayments

Other receivables

Total trade and other receivables

Less: non-current portion

Current portion

20  Trade and other payables

Group

Trade payables

Other payables

Accruals

Financial liabilities, excluding loans and borrowings, classified as 
financial liabilities measured at amortised cost

Other payables — contingent consideration

Financial liabilities, excluding loans and borrowings, classified as 
financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

Other payables — tax and social security payments

Deferred income

Total trade and other payables

Less: non-current portion of other payables  
— contingent consideration

Current portion

2016
£000

93,879

7,243

101,122

218

149

101,489

-

101,489

2016
£000

14,172

6,857

5,239

26,268

10,220

10,220

593

2,976

40,057

(8,825)

31,232

2015
£000

61,075

8,902

69,977

142

161

70,280

-

70,280

2015
£000

4,319

2,910

3,837

11,066

16,296

16,296

477

3,859

31,698

(7,330)

24,368

Company

Trade payables

Payables to related parties

Accruals

Total financial liabilities, excluding loans and borrowings, classified as 
financial liabilities measured at amortised cost

Other payables — contingent consideration

Financial liabilities, excluding loans and borrowings, classified as 
financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

Other payables — tax and social security payments

Total trade and other payables

Less: non-current portion of other payables  
— contingent consideration

Current portion

Book values approximate to fair value at 30 September 2016 and 2015. 

21  Loans and borrowings 

Group

Non-Current

Bank borrowings

Other loans

Finance lease creditor (note 27)

Current

Finance lease creditor (note 27)

Total loans and borrowings

2016
£000

1,336

23,517

1,063

25,916

82

82

104

26,102

-

26,102

2016
£000

37,133 

60 

214 

37,407

289 

289

37,696 

2015
£000

164

4,355

991

5,510

3,351

3,351

32

8,893

(351)

8,542

2015
£000

- 

60 

33 

93

63 

63

156 

Book values approximate to fair value at 30 September 2016 and 2015. 

The financial liability at fair value through profit and loss relates to contingent consideration outstanding from business 
combinations. The majority of this relates to deferred cash consideration dependent on the performance of the acquired 
businesses and the fair value is derived from the likely liabilities based on current performance against the targets at 
each reporting date. Also included in contingent consideration is a put/call agreement exercisable and payable in 2022 
to acquire the remaining 20% stake in Akvaforsk Genetics Center Inc for a sum determined by future performance. The 
minimum consideration is NOK 1 (one Krone) payable in the event the business under performs the minimum target set and 
the maximum consideration is capped at NOK 60m. If Akvaforsk Genetics Center Inc achieves the projections provided by 
the vendors, payment will be NOK 10m and this assumption has been used in calculating the fair value of the liability.

The fair value of loans and borrowings is not materially different to the carrying value and has not been separately 
disclosed. 

On 30 December 2015, the Group completed the acquisition of the Inve Aquaculture Group and on the same day entered 
into new borrowing facilities consisting of a five-year revolving credit facility of up to $70,000,000 secured on the assets 
of the parent company, UK subsidiary companies and certain overseas subsidiary companies. At 30 September 2016, 
$50,000,000 was drawn down on the facility. The interest rate on the facility is between 1.9% and 2.5% above LIBOR 
depending on leverage. The finance lease liabilities are secured on the assets to which they relate.

124

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

125

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
21  Loans and borrowings (continued)

22  Provisions

The currency profile of the Group’s loans and borrowings is as follows:

Sterling

US Dollar

Euro

Thai Baht

Company

The book value and fair value of loans and borrowings are as follows:

Non-Current

Bank borrowings

Other loans

Total loans and borrowings

2016
£000

97 

37,133 

456 

10 

37,696 

2016
£000

37,133 

60 

37,193 

The fair value of loans and borrowings is not materially different to the carrying value and has not been separately 
disclosed. 

The currency profile of the Company’s loans and borrowings is as follows:

Sterling

US Dollar

2016
£000

60 

37,133 

37,193 

2015
£000

156 

- 

- 

- 

156 

2015
£000

- 

60 

60 

2015
£000

60 

- 

60 

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Legal fees
provision
£000

Repairs
provision
£000

Other provisions
£000

300

201

(300)

201

-

349

-

(88)

462

462

-

462

201

-

201

30

-

-

30

-

40

-

-

70

70

-

70

30

-

30

750

52

-

802

291

107

63

(709)

554

554

-

554

802

-

802

Total

£000

1,080

253

(300)

1,033

291

496

63

(797)

1,086

1,086

-

1,086

1,033

-

1,033

At 1 October 2014

Charged to profit or loss

Utilised in year

At 1 October 2015

Assumed in a business combination

Charged to profit or loss

Foreign exchange movement

Utilised in year

At 30 September 2016

Current

Non-current

At 30 September 2016

Current

Non-current

At 30 September 2015

Legal fees provision

The legal fees provision relates to potential costs the Group may be liable for should it not succeed with an appeal made 
against an adverse court ruling on a legal action it took against a third party in relation to intellectual property matters. 
Management believes the provision held to be adequate to defend this claim and expect conclusion to the matter in the 
next 12 months.

Repairs provision

Under property operating lease agreements, FAI Farms Limited, a subsidiary company, has a rolling obligation to maintain all 
properties to the standard that prevailed at the inception of the lease. The Directors estimate the costs of this obligation at 
£15,000 (2015: £15,000). Additionally, Benchmark Vaccines Limited has a repairs provision of £55,000 (2015: £15,000) 
in respect of its Braintree premises.

Other provisions

During the year provisions of a further £107,000 were made and amounts of £709,000 were utilised to total £200,000 
(2015: £802,000) in relation to potential rebates to customers/distributors based on targeted volumes, price fluctuations 
and potential stock returns under right of return clauses. The Directors expect these to be settled in the financial year 
ended 30 September 2017.

A provision with a fair value of £291,000 was acquired with INVE in relation to an overseas customs duty dispute. Since 
then, the balance has been increased to £354,000 due to being retranslated at the year end foreign exchange rate. The 
directors believe this provision to be adequate and that the matter should be resolved in the next 12 months.

No provisions were held by the Company at the year end (2015: £nil).

126

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

127

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
23  Deferred tax

23  Deferred tax (continued)

Deferred tax is calculated in full on temporary differences under the liability method using the substantively enacted rates in 
the relevant territories in which the temporary differences and tax losses are expected to reverse.

The movement on the deferred tax account is as shown below:

Group

At 1 October

Acquired during the year

Recognised in income statement

Tax credit (note 11)

Exchange differences

Recognised in equity

At 30 September

Company

At 1 October

Recognised in income statement

Tax (expense)/credit

Recognised in equity

At 30 September

2016
£000

(8,224)

(50,106)

4,040

(8,676)

(295)

(63,261)

2016
£000

170

(127)

(43)

-

2015
£000

339

(9,748)

458

631

96

(8,224)

2015
£000

47

119

4

170

There was no deferred tax recognised in other comprehensive income. 

Deferred tax assets have been recognised in respect of all tax losses and other temporary differences giving rise to 
deferred tax assets where the Directors believe it is probable that these assets will be recovered. The Directors believe 
there is sufficient evidence that the amounts recognised will be recovered against future taxable profits. The Group did 
not recognise deferred tax assets of £5,535,0000 (2015: £2,930,000) in respect of losses amounting to £21,903,000 
(2015: £14,652,000) and temporary differences of £4,358,000 (2015: £nil), where there was insufficient evidence that 
the amounts will be recovered.

No deferred tax is recognised on the unremitted earnings of overseas subsidiaries and joint ventures. As the earnings are 
continually reinvested by the Group and there is no intention for these entities to pay dividends, no tax is expected to be 
payable on them in the foreseeable future. 

The movements in deferred tax assets and liabilities (prior to the offsetting of balances within the same jurisdiction as 
permitted by IAS 12) during the period, together with amounts recognised in the consolidated income statement and 
amounts recognised in other comprehensive income are as follows:

Group

Accelerated capital 
allowances

Other temporary and 
deductible differences

Available losses

Fair value of share options

Net tax assets /(liabilities)

Liability
2016
£000

(Charged)/ 
credited to profit 
or loss
2016
£000

Net
2016
£000

(Charged)/ 
credited to 
equity
2016
£000

(62,748)

(62,748)

(3,118)

(800)

-

-

(800)

287

-

(1,149)

225

2

(63,548)

(63,261)

(4,040)

-

-

295

295

Asset
2016
£000

-

-

287

-

287

Group

Accelerated capital 
allowances

Other temporary and 
deductible differences

Available losses

Fair value of share options

Net tax assets /(liabilities)

Company

Accelerated capital 
allowances

Other temporary and 
deductible differences

Available losses

Fair value of share options

Net tax assets /(liabilities)

Company

Accelerated capital 
allowances

Other temporary and 
deductible differences

Available losses

Fair value of share options

Net tax assets /(liabilities)

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Asset
2015
£000

Liability
2015
£000

(Charged)/ 
credited to profit 
or loss
2015
£000

Net
2015
£000

(Charged)/ 
credited to 
equity
2015
£000

-

(8,932)

(8,932)

349

62

297

708

-

-

-

349

62

297

(8,932)

(8,224)

243

289

(74)

-

458

-

-

-

96

96

Asset
2016
£000

Liability
2016
£000

(Charged)/ 
credited to profit 
or loss
2016
£000

Net
2016
£000

(Charged)/ 
credited to 
equity
2016
£000

-

-

-

-

-

Asset
2015
£000

-

130

-

43

173

-

-

-

-

-

Liability
2015
£000

(3)

-

-

-

(3)

-

-

-

-

-

Net
2015
£000

(3)

130

-

43

170

3

(130)

-

-

(127)

-

-

-

(43)

(43)

(Charged)/ 
credited to profit 
or loss
2015
£000

(Charged)/ 
credited to 
equity
2015
£000

1

118

-

-

119

-

-

-

4

4

128

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

129

 
24  Share capital and share premium

25  Reserves

Allotted, called up and fully paid

Number

£000

£000

Reserve

Description and purpose

Share Capital

Share premium

The following describes the nature and purpose of each reserve within equity: 

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Share premium reserve

Amount subscribed for share capital in excess of nominal value.

Capital redemption reserve

Amounts transferred from share capital on redemption of issued shares.

Foreign exchange reserve

Gains/losses arising on retranslating the net assets of overseas operations into sterling.

Retained earnings

All other net gains and losses and transactions with owners (e.g. dividends) not recognised 
elsewhere. To simplify presentation, the share-based payment reserve has been combined 
with the retained earnings reserve in the current period. The share-based payment reserve 
recognised the value of equity-settled share-based payment transactions provided to 
employees, including management personnel, as part of their remuneration. Refer to note 30 
for further details of these plans.

26  Trading and Investing Activities

The Group separates its operations into Trading Activities and Investing Activities in order to report the performance of its 
business. Trading Activities are those operations which generate earnings in the current period. Investing Activities are 
those activities which have no associated income stream in the current period, but which are intended to provide the Group 
with income generating operations in future periods. These measures are used by management for planning and reporting 
purposes and in discussions with and presentations to investment analysts and are defined below. These measures are not 
defined in International Financial Reporting Standards and may not be comparable with similarly described measures used 
by other companies.

In arriving at Trading Activities, the following Investing Activities are excluded from reported results:

—  exceptional costs of a non-recurring nature

—  costs of acquiring new businesses outlined in note 31

—  pre-operational expenses for new ventures 

—  expenditure on research and development

Ordinary shares of 0.1 penny each

Balance at 30 September 2014

136,977,095

Shares issued to fund the acquisition of 
Salmobreed and Stofnfiskur

Share issue costs recognised through equity

Exercise of share options

82,353,000

-

19,430

Balance at 30 September 2015

219,349,525

Shares placed to fund the acquisition of INVE

215,922,141

Shares issued as consideration for the 
acquisition of INVE

Exercise of share options

Shares issued to management 

Placing shares to fund investments in joint 
ventures and capital projects

Share issue costs recognised through equity

Balance at 30 September 2016

38,635,671

50,742

110,873

47,279,127

-

521,348,079

137

82

-

-

219

216

39

-

-

47

-

521

26,903

69,918

(2,149)

-

94,672

185,477

33,188

-

95

30,684

(4,685)

339,431

On 19 December 2014, the Company issued 82,353,000 shares of 0.1p each at a price of 85p per share to fund the 
acquisition of the entire share capital of Salmobreed AS and 89.45 per cent of the issued share capital of Stofnfiskur HF.

On 30 December 2015, the Company issued 215,922,141 shares of 0.1p each at a price of 86p per share to fund the 
acquisition of INVE Aquaculture Holdings B.V. In addition, on 31 December 2015, the Company issued 38,635,671 shares 
of 0.1p each at 86p as part consideration for the acquisition. Non-recurring costs of £4.4 million were incurred in relation to 
the share placing and this has been charged to the share premium account.

On 2 March 2016, the Company issued a total of 50,742 shares of 0.1p each to 6 employees of the Group relating to 
share options granted in August 2013 and March 2015.

On 20 April 2016, the Company issued a total of 110,873 shares of 0.1p each at a price of 86p per share to certain 
managers of INVE Aquaculture Holdings B.V.

On 4 August 2016, the Company placed 47,279,127 shares of 0.1p each at a price of 65p per share to fund investment 
in certain strategic joint ventures and capital projects. Non-recurring costs of £0.2 million were incurred in relation to the 
share placing and this has been charged to the share premium account.

Employee share option scheme

The Company introduced an employee share option scheme in 2010. The options existing immediately before admission 
to trading on AIM on 18 December 2013 were subdivided into equivalent options over the new 0.1p ordinary shares. At the 
year end, options exist over 5,257,431 (2015: 2,401,186) 0.1p ordinary shares in the Company and the exercise price is 
the nominal value of 0.1p per share. Movements in the share options are disclosed in note 30.

Members of the scheme can exercise the options at any point from the third anniversary of the option grant date until the 
options lapse on the tenth anniversary of the option grant date. Options cannot be exercised after the option holder ceases 
to hold employment with any member of the Group.

130

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

131

 
26  Trading and Investing Activities (continued)

26  Trading and Investing Activities (continued)

A reconciliation of reported earnings to earnings from Trading Activities is shown below.

Reconciliation of Reported Earnings to Earnings from Trading Activities — year ended 30 September 2015

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Reconciliation of Reported Earnings to Earnings from Trading Activities — year ended 30 September 2016

Investing Activities

Year ended 
30 September 
2016
£000

Exceptional 
Items
£000

Acquisition 
related costs
£000

Pre-
operational 
expenses 
for new 
ventures
£000

R&D 
expenditure
£000

- 

- 

- 

146 

146 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Trading 
Activities
£000

109,375 

(58,562)

50,813 

12,945 

1,363 

11,720 

(28,502)

12,945 

1,363 

11,720 

22,311 

- 

- 

- 

- 

250 

245 

(2,609)

(13,504)

146 

12,945 

1,363 

12,215 

6,198 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(6,170)

3,984 

273 

109,375 

(58,562)

50,813 

(54,676)

(3,863)

(2,859)

(13,749)

(20,471)

(6,170)

3,984 

273 

(22,384)

146 

12,945 

1,363 

12,215 

4,285 

Revenue

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Operating costs

EBITDA

Depreciation

Amortisation

Operating (loss)/profit

Finance costs

Finance income

Share of profit of equity-
accounted investees, net of tax

(Loss) /profit on ordinary 
activities before taxation 

Tax on (loss) /profit on  
ordinary activities

(Loss)/profit for the period

(18,346)

146 

12,945 

1,363 

11,364 

4,038 

- 

- 

- 

(851)

3,187 

7,472 

Investing Activities

Year ended 
30 September 
2015
£000

Exceptional 
Items
£000

Acquisition 
related costs
£000

Pre-
operational 
expenses 
for new 
ventures
£000

R&D 
expenditure
£000

Trading 
Activities
£000

44,199 

(28,102)

16,097 

- 

- 

- 

6,595 

(13,674)

6,595 

2,423 

73 

239 

(1,113)

(2,825)

Revenue

Cost of sales

Gross profit

Operating costs

EBITDA

Depreciation

Amortisation

44,199 

(28,102)

16,097 

(23,328)

(7,231)

(1,304)

(3,064)

- 

- 

- 

160 

160 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1,334 

1,334 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1,565 

1,565 

118 

- 

Operating (loss) /profit

(11,599)

160 

1,334 

1,683 

6,907 

(1,515)

Finance costs

Finance income

Loss on ordinary activities 
before taxation

Tax on loss on ordinary 
activities

(34)

274 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(2)

- 

(12)

(34)

260 

(11,359)

160 

1,334 

1,681 

6,895 

(1,289)

(396)

- 

- 

(4)

(351)

(751)

(Loss) /profit for the period

(11,755)

160 

1,334 

1,677 

6,544 

(2,040)

Loss per share (pence)

(5.96)

 0.08 

 0.66 

 0.83 

 3.26 

(1.13)

Weighted average number  
of shares (thousands)

201,280 

201,280 

201,280 

201,280 

201,280 

201,280 

(Loss)/earnings per share 
(pence)

Weighted average number of 
shares (thousands)

(4.39)

 0.03 

 3.10 

 0.33 

 2.72 

 1.79 

417,952 

417,952 

417,952 

417,952 

417,952 

417,952 

27  Leases

Finance leases

The Group leases plant and machinery with a carrying value of £558,000 (2015: £196,000). Such assets are generally 
classified as finance leases as the rental period amounts to the estimated useful economic life of the assets concerned 
and often the Group has the right to purchase the assets outright at the end of the minimum lease term by paying a 
nominal amount. 

Future lease payments are due as follows:

Not later than one year

Later than one year and not later than five years

Later than five years

Minimum lease 
payments 
2016
£000

294

215

-

509

Interest 
2016
£000

Present value 
2016
£000

5

1

-

6

289

214

-

503

132

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

133

 
 
 
 
27  Leases (continued)

Minimum lease 
payments 2015
£000

Interest 2015
£000

Present value
2015
£000

Not later than one year

Later than one year and not later than five years

Later than five years

66

37

-

103

The present values of future lease payments are analysed as:

Current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Operating leases — lessee

3

4

-

7

2016
£000

289

214

503

63

33

-

96

2015
£000

63

33

96

The Group has entered into commercial leases on certain items of land and buildings. These leases have an average life of 
greater than five years. There are no restrictions placed on the Group by entering into these leases.

The total future value of minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases for land and buildings are as 
follows:

Not later than one year

Later than one year and not later than five years

Later than five years

2016
£000

1,765

4,122

2,825

8,712

2015
£000

683

1,526

2,471

4,680

28  Retirement benefits

The Group operates a defined contribution pension scheme. The assets of the scheme are held separately from those of 
the Group in an independently administered fund. The pension cost represents contributions payable by the Group and 
amounted to £1,079,000 (2015: £479,000). Contributions totalling £306,200 (2015: £100,200) were payable to the fund 
at the balance sheet date and are included in other payables.

29  Capital commitments

At 30 September 2016 the Group and Company had capital commitments as follows:

Group 
2016
£000

Group
2015
£000

Company
2016
£000

Company
2015
£000

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

30  Share-based payment

Share options

The Group operates an EMI based equity settled share option scheme for certain employees. Options are exercisable at a 
price equal to the nominal value of the parent Company’s shares. The vesting period is three years. If the options remain 
unexercised after a period of ten years from the date of grant the options expire. Options are forfeited if the employee 
leaves the Group before the options vest.

The share options under the scheme are as follows: 

Year ended 30 September 2016:

As at
1 October 
2015

89,000

1,183,000

988,753

140,433

No. of options

Granted in 
2016

Exercised in 
2016

Forfeited in 
2016

As at 
30 September 
2016

Option 
Price*

Exercise 
Period

-

-

-

-

-

-

89,000

0.10p

(35,000)

(35,000)

1,113,000

0.10p

(15,742)

(108,108)

864,903

0.10p

-

-

(21,037)

119,396

0.10p

(22,361)

3,071,132

0.10p

August 2016 
to July 2023

August 2016 
to July 2023

March 2018 
to February 
2025

July 2018 to 
June 2025

March 2019 
to February 
2026

-

3,093,493

Year

2013

2013

2015

2015

2016

* The option price is the nominal value of the parent Company’s shares. 

Of the total number of options outstanding at 30 September 2016, 1,202,000 (2015: nil) were exercisable.

Options exercised in 2016 resulted in 50,742 shares being issued at a weighted average price of 0.1p. The related 
weighted average share price at the time of exercise was 59.5p per share. 

Year ended 30 September 2015:

As at
1 October 
2014

89,000

1,193,000

-

-

No. of options

Granted in 
2015

Exercised in 
2015

Forfeited in 
2015

As at 
30 September 
2015

Option 
Price*

Exercise 
Period

-

-

-

(10,000)

-

-

89,000

0.10p

1,183,000

0.10p

1,026,501

(9,430)

(28,318)

988,753

0.10p

140,433

-

-

140,433

0.10p

August 2016 
to July 2023

August 2016 
to July 2023

March 2018 
to February 
2025

July 2018 to 
June 2025

Year

2013

2013

2015

2015

Contracted for but not provided within these 
financial statements

4,833

6,672

-

-

* The option price is the nominal value of the parent Company’s shares.

Options exercised in 2015 resulted in 19,430 shares being issued at a weighted average price of 0.1p. The related 
weighted average share price at the time of exercise was 98p per share. 

134

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

135

 
 
 
 
 
 
30  Share-based payment (continued)

Share options issued in August 2013

31  Business Combinations

During the year the following business combinations occurred:

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

Share options outstanding at the year-end had a weighted average exercise price of 0.1p and a weighted average remaining 
contractual life of 7 years. 

The fair value of the EMI equity settled share options granted is estimated at the date of grant using the Black Scholes 
Merton model taking into account the terms and conditions on which the options were granted. The expense recognised for 
these options during the year was £7,000 (2015: £8,000). This has been reflected in the income statement and included 
within Operating Costs — Trading Activities.

Additional share options issued in August 2013

Share options outstanding at the year-end had a weighted average exercise price of 0.1p and a weighted average remaining 
contractual life of 7 years. The fair value of the EMI equity settled share options granted is estimated at the date of grant 
using the Black Scholes Merton model taking into account the terms and conditions on which the options were granted. 

The expense recognised for these options during the year was £93,000 (2015: £113,000). This has been reflected in the 
income statement and included within Operating Costs — Trading Activities. 

Of the options issued in August 2013, 35,000 were exercised early in respect of good leavers.

Share options issued in March 2015 and July 2015

Share options outstanding at the year-end had a weighted average exercise price of 0.1p and a weighted average remaining 
contractual life of 9 years. The fair value of the EMI equity settled share options granted is estimated at the date of grant 
using the Black Scholes Merton model taking into account the terms and conditions on which the options were granted. 

The expense recognised for these options during the year was £344,000 (2015: £337,000). This has been reflected in the 
income statement and included within Operating Costs — Trading Activities.

Of the options issued in March 2015, 15,742 were exercised early in respect of a good leavers.

Share options issued in March 2016

Share options outstanding at the year-end had a weighted average exercise price of 0.1p and a weighted average remaining 
contractual life of 9 years. The fair value of the EMI equity settled share options granted is estimated at the date of grant 
using the Black Scholes Merton model taking into account the terms and conditions on which the options were granted. 

The expense recognised for these options during the year was £305,000 (2015: £nil). This has been reflected in the 
income statement and included within Operating Costs — Trading Activities.

Share warrants

In January 2015, the Company issued warrants to acquire 259,312 ordinary shares at 112p per share as part 
consideration for the acquisition of the Improve International Limited business and its subsidiaries. The exercise of 
these warrants is subject to the extension of certain contracts and the warrants are exercisable at any point between the 
extension of these contracts and six months thereafter.

The Group did not enter into any other share-based payment transactions with parties other than employees during the 
current or previous period. 

The total charge reflected in the consolidated income statement in relation to all of the above share based transactions, 
and included within Operating Costs was £749,000 (2015: £458,000), all charged to Operating Costs — Trading Activities. 
The share-based payment expense comprises:

Equity-settled schemes

Total share based payment charge

2016
£000

749

749

2015
£000

458

458

The total charge reflected in the Company’s income statement was £149,000 (2015: £128,000), all charged to Operating 
Costs — Trading Activities (2015: all charged to Operating Costs — Trading Activities).

On 30 December 2015, Benchmark Holdings plc completed the acquisition of 100% of INVE Aquaculture Holding B.V. 
(“INVE”), a leading specialist manufacturer of primary stage technically advanced nutrition and health products for 
aquaculture, for a total consideration of $342 million (approximately £230.7 million).

The Directors identified a strong strategic rationale for the acquisition. INVE’s leadership in speciality aquaculture 
nutrition market is complementary to Benchmark’s position in genetics and health. The acquired business complements 
Benchmark’s existing expertise and operations within aquaculture and the enlarged group will become a leading global 
provider of technology for sustainable food production, with a strong focus on the aquaculture sector, benefiting from 
immediate scale in advanced aquaculture nutrition and health products, enhanced sales, marketing and distribution network 
and the opportunity for cross selling and new product development. The acquisition created the Advanced Animal Nutrition 
Division.

In view of the size of the acquisition relative to the Group, the transaction was classified as a reverse takeover under the 
AIM rules. For accounting purposes, Benchmark Holdings plc has been identified as the acquirer and the transaction has 
been accounted for using the acquisition method. This is because Benchmark Holdings plc has obtained control over the 
operations of INVE as a result of the transaction.

Certain intangible assets have been separately identified and provisionally valued as shown in the table below. Related 
deferred tax has also been provided. The goodwill arising on the acquisition represents the synergies available from 
combining the two businesses, and the skills and technical talent of the INVE workforce.

On 11 August 2016, the group acquired control over aquaculture breeding programmes previously owned and operated 
by Centro de Investigación de la Acuicultura de Colombia Ceniacua through its wholly-owned subsidiary, Genética Spring 
S.A.S.(“Genética Spring”) together with the related business, freehold land, buildings and assets, for a total consideration 
of $2.17m (£1.67m). The acquisition added a third species, shrimp, to Benchmark’s aquaculture breeding business in 
salmon and tilapia, and strengthened Benchmark’s position in the fast-growing shrimp industry. 

Details of the fair value of the consideration paid and assets and liabilities assumed during the year are shown in the table 
below:

Consideration
Cost of investment

Satisfied by:
Cash
Deferred consideration
Equity
Total consideration

Fair value of assets acquired
Customer list
Patents and trademarks
Intellectual property
Contracts and Licences
Genetic Materials and Breeding Nuclei
Deferred tax on intangibles
Fixed assets
Investments
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Trade and other payables
Tax and social security
Loans and borrowings
Provisions
Total identifiable net assets
Goodwill

INVE Aquaculture 
Holdings B.V.
£000 

Genética Spring 
£000

Total
£000

230,667 

1,673 

232,340 

197,440 
- 
33,227 
230,667 

4,789 
208 
117,019 
25,562 
- 
(50,106)
5,017 
350 
16,686 
14,914 
6,647 
(10,104)
(2,373)
(570)
(291)
127,748 
102,919 

709 
964 
- 
1,673 

- 
- 
- 
- 
601 
- 
1,072 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
1,673 
- 

198,149 
964 
33,227 
232,340 

4,789 
208 
117,019 
25,562 
601 
(50,106)
6,089 
350 
16,686 
14,914 
6,647 
(10,104)
(2,373)
(570)
(291)
129,421 
102,919 

136

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

137

 
 
STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITIONAL   
INFORMATION

32  Related party transactions

During the year, Group entities entered into the following trading transactions with related parties that are not members of 
the Group:

Benchmark Holdings Limited Executive Pension scheme

The following balances are payable at the end of the reporting period:

Benchmark Holdings Limited Executive Pension scheme

The Company is controlled by the shareholders. There is no single controlling party.

33  Contingent liabilities

Purchases

2016
£000

72

2016
£000

20

2015
£000

72

2015
£000

11

There is a full cross guarantee in respect of borrowings of other Group undertakings. Total borrowings of other Group 
undertakings at 30 September 2016 were £3,559,000 (2015: £408,000).

34  Notes supporting statement of cash flows

Cash and cash equivalents for purposes of the statement of cash flows comprises:

Group

Cash at bank and in hand

Cash and cash equivalents

Company

Cash at bank and in hand

Cash and cash equivalents

2016
£000

38,140

38,140

27,480

27,480

2015
£000

13,564

13,564

5,542

5,542

31  Business Combinations (continued)

Measurement of fair values

The valuation techniques used for measuring the fair value of material assets acquired were as follows.

Assets acquired

Valuation technique

Property, plant and equipment Market comparison technique and cost technique: The valuation model considers quoted 

Intangible assets 

Inventories 

market prices for similar items when they are available, and depreciated replacement 
cost when appropriate. Depreciated replacement cost reflects adjustments for physical 
deterioration as well as functional and economic obsolescence.

Relief-from-royalty method and multi-period excess earnings method: The relief-from-royalty 
method considers the discounted estimated royalty payments that are expected to be 
avoided as a result of the patents or trademarks being owned. The multi-period excess 
earnings method considers the present value of net cash flows expected to be generated by 
the customer relationships, by excluding any cash flows related to contributory assets. 

Market comparison technique: The fair value is determined based on the estimated selling 
price in the ordinary course of business less the estimated costs of completion and sale, 
and a reasonable profit margin based on the effort required to complete and sell the 
inventories. 

Other assets and liabilities

Management consider the fair value of other assets and liabilities to be equivalent to the 
purchase price, which was supported by an independent valuation. 

The fair value of the ordinary shares issued was based on the listed share price of the Company at 30 December 2015 of 
£0.86 per share.

If new information obtained within one year of the date of acquisition about facts and circumstances that existed at the 
date of acquisition identifies adjustments to the above amounts, or any additional provisions that existed at the date of 
acquisition, then the accounting for the acquisition will be revised.

The Group incurred acquisition related costs of £9,504,000 in respect of INVE Aquaculture B.V. and £135,000 in respect of 
Genética Spring.

During the year INVE contributed £54,870,000 to the Group’s revenue and increased EBITDA by £15,729,000 for the 
period. Genética Spring contributed £nil to the Group’s revenue and decreased EBITDA by £61,000 for the period. The table 
below shows the Group’s pro-forma revenue and EBITDA if the acquisitions had taken place at the start of the period.

Revenue

EBITDA

32  Related party transactions

INVE Aquaculture 
Holdings B.V.
£000 

2016
£000 

Genética Spring 
£000 

109,375 

(3,863)

14,200 

2,300 

- 

- 

Total
£000 

123,575 

(1,563)

Transactions between the Company and its subsidiary undertakings (see note 16), which are related parties, amounted 
to £1,912,800 in the year (2015: £643,000). These transactions related to inter-company recharges. Balances with 
subsidiary undertakings are shown in notes 19 and 20. Details of transactions between the Group and other related parties 
are disclosed in the following note. 

Included within trade and other payables due after more than one year are the following loans from related parties:

Director

Total

Group
2016
£000

(60)

(60)

Group
2015
£000

(60)

(60)

Company
2016
£000

(60)

(60)

Company
2015
£000

(60)

(60)

The loan from Malcolm Pye, Chief Executive Officer, has no fixed repayment date.

138

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Financial Statements | Notes forming part of the financial statements

139

 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITI ONAL   
INFO RMATION

04 
Additional 
Information

142  Glossary 

143  Advisers

GLOSSARY

ADVISERS

STRATEGIC   
REPORT

GOVERNANCE

FINANCIAL   
STATEMENTS

ADDITI ONAL   
INFO RMATION

3Es

Environment, Ethics & Economics — 
Benchmark’s framework for sustainability

Adjusted  
EBITDA 

EBITDA before exceptional  
and acquisition costs

AGM

AIM

API

CAGR

CEO

CFO

CGU

COO

CPD

Defra

Annual General Meeting

Alternative Investment Market

Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient

Compound Annual Growth Rate

Chief Executive Officer

Chief Financial Officer

Cash Generating Unit

Chief Operating Officer

Continuing Professional Development

Department for Environment,  
Food and Rural Affairs

IP

IPO

LTIP

M&A

PD

Intellectual Property

Initial Public Offering

Long-term Incentive Plan

Mergers & Acquisitions

Pancreas Disease

QCA Code

Quoted Companies Alliance Code — 
outlining best practice for quoted companies

qPCR

QTL

 Quantitative polymerase chain reaction  
— a diagnostic tool

Quantitative Trait Loci —  
DNA containing/linked to genes  
that underlie a quantitative trait

R&D

Research & Development

SalmoBreed 
Salten

Benchmark’s new land-based salmon egg 
and broodstock production facility currently 
under construction

EBITDA

Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation  
and amortisation

Salmosan®

Benchmark’s market-leading  
sea lice treatment

EMI scheme

Enterprise Management Incentive scheme

EU GMP

EU Good Manufacturing Practice

FAO

FAWC

FCR

FY

Food and Agriculture Organisation

Farm Animal Welfare Committee

Feed Conversion Ratio

Financial Year

SIP

STM

Trading  
Activities

Share Incentive Plan

Science, technical and medical —  
referring to the publishing market

Trading Activities are those operations which 
generate earnings in the current period 
excluding Investing Activities

Trading EBITDA

EBITDA from Trading Activities

 Virus Like Particle. VLPs do not contain 
any viral genetic material and can offer 
a safer alternative to live-attenuated or 
inactivated vaccines. Several first-generation 
VLP approaches have yielded successful 
vaccines for humans

Genomic 
Selection

Targeted breeding by selecting individuals  
based on their genome

VLP

Histopathology

Diagnosis and study of disease

HypoCat™

A breakthrough vaccine for cats which 
neutralises the primary cause of human  
allergic reaction to cats

IFRS

International Financial Reporting Standards

Investing 
Activities

Investing Activities are those activities which 
have no associated income stream in the current 
period, but which are intended to provide the 
Group with income generating operations in 
future periods. Includes exceptional items, 
research and development expenditure,  
pre-operational expenses for new ventures  
and costs of acquiring new businesses

Nominated Adviser and 
Broker: Numis Securities

Lawyers:  
Travers Smith LLP

10 Paternoster Square  
London  
EC4M 7LT

10 Snow Hill 
London 
EC1A 2AL

Auditor: KPMG LLP

Bankers: Lloyds Bank

1 Sovereign Square 
Sovereign Street 
Leeds 
LS1 4DW

Registrars: Equiniti Limited

Aspect House 
Spencer Road 
Lancing 
West Sussex 
BN99 6DA

1st Floor 
Butt Dyke House 
33 Park Row 
Nottingham 
NG1 6GY

Financial Advisers:  
Equity Strategies

3rd Floor  
New Liverpool House 
15 Eldon Street 
London 
EC2M 7LD

Information regarding forward-looking statements

This document includes statements that are, 
or may be deemed to be, ‘forward-looking 
statements’. These forward-looking statements 
can be identified by the use of forward-looking 
terminology, including the terms ‘believes’, 
‘estimates’, ‘plans’, ‘projects’, ‘anticipates’, 
‘expects’, ‘intends’, ‘may’, ‘will’, or ‘should’ or, 
in each case, their negative or other variations 
or comparable terminology, or by discussions of 
strategy, plans, objectives, goals, future events 
or intentions. These forward-looking statements 
include all matters that are not historical facts. 
They appear in a number of places throughout 
this document and include, but are not limited 

to, statements regarding the Company’s 
intentions, beliefs or current expectations 
concerning, among other things, its business, 
results of operations, financial position, 
prospects, growth, product pipeline, strategies 
and the industry in which it operates. By their 
nature, forward-looking statements involve 
risk and uncertainty because they relate to 
future events and circumstances and are 
not guarantees of future performance. The 
actual results may differ materially from those 
described in, or suggested by, the forward-looking 
statements contained in this document. Any 
forward-looking statements in this document 

reflect only the Directors’ and the Company’s 
current intentions or beliefs. Subject to the 
requirements of the AIM Rules, the Disclosure 
and Transparency Rules and any other applicable 
law or regulation, Benchmark explicitly disclaims 
any obligation or undertaking publicly to release 
the result of any revisions to any forward-looking 
statements in this document that may occur due 
to any change in Benchmark’s expectations or to 
reflect events or circumstances after the date of 
this document.

All images copyright © 2016 Benchmark Holdings Plc and its subsidiaries 
Printed on FSC Certified paper — Manufactured with Windpower 

Benchmark Holdings plc Annual Report 2016 | Additional Information

143

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Benchmark is securing  
a position at the heart  
of the blue revolution — 
driving shareholder value  
as the industry grows  
and professionalises.

Benchmark Holdings plc

Benchmark House 
8 Smithy Wood Drive 
Sheffield 
S35 1QN

t. +44 (0)114 240 9939 
w. benchmarkplc.com 
e. info@benchmarkplc.com